1 //===- CodeGenPrepare.cpp - Prepare a function for code generation --------===// 2 // 3 // Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions. 4 // See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. 5 // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception 6 // 7 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 8 // 9 // This pass munges the code in the input function to better prepare it for 10 // SelectionDAG-based code generation. This works around limitations in it's 11 // basic-block-at-a-time approach. It should eventually be removed. 12 // 13 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 14 15 #include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h" 16 #include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h" 17 #include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h" 18 #include "llvm/ADT/PointerIntPair.h" 19 #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h" 20 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h" 21 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h" 22 #include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h" 23 #include "llvm/Analysis/BlockFrequencyInfo.h" 24 #include "llvm/Analysis/BranchProbabilityInfo.h" 25 #include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h" 26 #include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h" 27 #include "llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h" 28 #include "llvm/Analysis/MemoryBuiltins.h" 29 #include "llvm/Analysis/ProfileSummaryInfo.h" 30 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetLibraryInfo.h" 31 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h" 32 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h" 33 #include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h" 34 #include "llvm/CodeGen/Analysis.h" 35 #include "llvm/CodeGen/ISDOpcodes.h" 36 #include "llvm/CodeGen/SelectionDAGNodes.h" 37 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetLowering.h" 38 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetPassConfig.h" 39 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetSubtargetInfo.h" 40 #include "llvm/CodeGen/ValueTypes.h" 41 #include "llvm/Config/llvm-config.h" 42 #include "llvm/IR/Argument.h" 43 #include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h" 44 #include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h" 45 #include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h" 46 #include "llvm/IR/Constant.h" 47 #include "llvm/IR/Constants.h" 48 #include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h" 49 #include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h" 50 #include "llvm/IR/Dominators.h" 51 #include "llvm/IR/Function.h" 52 #include "llvm/IR/GetElementPtrTypeIterator.h" 53 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h" 54 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h" 55 #include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h" 56 #include "llvm/IR/InlineAsm.h" 57 #include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h" 58 #include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h" 59 #include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h" 60 #include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h" 61 #include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h" 62 #include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h" 63 #include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h" 64 #include "llvm/IR/Module.h" 65 #include "llvm/IR/Operator.h" 66 #include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h" 67 #include "llvm/IR/Statepoint.h" 68 #include "llvm/IR/Type.h" 69 #include "llvm/IR/Use.h" 70 #include "llvm/IR/User.h" 71 #include "llvm/IR/Value.h" 72 #include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h" 73 #include "llvm/IR/ValueMap.h" 74 #include "llvm/Pass.h" 75 #include "llvm/Support/BlockFrequency.h" 76 #include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h" 77 #include "llvm/Support/Casting.h" 78 #include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h" 79 #include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h" 80 #include "llvm/Support/Debug.h" 81 #include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h" 82 #include "llvm/Support/MachineValueType.h" 83 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h" 84 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h" 85 #include "llvm/Target/TargetMachine.h" 86 #include "llvm/Target/TargetOptions.h" 87 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h" 88 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BypassSlowDivision.h" 89 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SimplifyLibCalls.h" 90 #include <algorithm> 91 #include <cassert> 92 #include <cstdint> 93 #include <iterator> 94 #include <limits> 95 #include <memory> 96 #include <utility> 97 #include <vector> 98 99 using namespace llvm; 100 using namespace llvm::PatternMatch; 101 102 #define DEBUG_TYPE "codegenprepare" 103 104 STATISTIC(NumBlocksElim, "Number of blocks eliminated"); 105 STATISTIC(NumPHIsElim, "Number of trivial PHIs eliminated"); 106 STATISTIC(NumGEPsElim, "Number of GEPs converted to casts"); 107 STATISTIC(NumCmpUses, "Number of uses of Cmp expressions replaced with uses of " 108 "sunken Cmps"); 109 STATISTIC(NumCastUses, "Number of uses of Cast expressions replaced with uses " 110 "of sunken Casts"); 111 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInsts, "Number of memory instructions whose address " 112 "computations were sunk"); 113 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInstsPhiCreated, 114 "Number of phis created when address " 115 "computations were sunk to memory instructions"); 116 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInstsSelectCreated, 117 "Number of select created when address " 118 "computations were sunk to memory instructions"); 119 STATISTIC(NumExtsMoved, "Number of [s|z]ext instructions combined with loads"); 120 STATISTIC(NumExtUses, "Number of uses of [s|z]ext instructions optimized"); 121 STATISTIC(NumAndsAdded, 122 "Number of and mask instructions added to form ext loads"); 123 STATISTIC(NumAndUses, "Number of uses of and mask instructions optimized"); 124 STATISTIC(NumRetsDup, "Number of return instructions duplicated"); 125 STATISTIC(NumDbgValueMoved, "Number of debug value instructions moved"); 126 STATISTIC(NumSelectsExpanded, "Number of selects turned into branches"); 127 STATISTIC(NumStoreExtractExposed, "Number of store(extractelement) exposed"); 128 129 static cl::opt<bool> DisableBranchOpts( 130 "disable-cgp-branch-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 131 cl::desc("Disable branch optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 132 133 static cl::opt<bool> 134 DisableGCOpts("disable-cgp-gc-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 135 cl::desc("Disable GC optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 136 137 static cl::opt<bool> DisableSelectToBranch( 138 "disable-cgp-select2branch", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 139 cl::desc("Disable select to branch conversion.")); 140 141 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkUsingGEPs( 142 "addr-sink-using-gep", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 143 cl::desc("Address sinking in CGP using GEPs.")); 144 145 static cl::opt<bool> EnableAndCmpSinking( 146 "enable-andcmp-sinking", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 147 cl::desc("Enable sinkinig and/cmp into branches.")); 148 149 static cl::opt<bool> DisableStoreExtract( 150 "disable-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 151 cl::desc("Disable store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 152 153 static cl::opt<bool> StressStoreExtract( 154 "stress-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 155 cl::desc("Stress test store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 156 157 static cl::opt<bool> DisableExtLdPromotion( 158 "disable-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 159 cl::desc("Disable ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) optimization in " 160 "CodeGenPrepare")); 161 162 static cl::opt<bool> StressExtLdPromotion( 163 "stress-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 164 cl::desc("Stress test ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) " 165 "optimization in CodeGenPrepare")); 166 167 static cl::opt<bool> DisablePreheaderProtect( 168 "disable-preheader-prot", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 169 cl::desc("Disable protection against removing loop preheaders")); 170 171 static cl::opt<bool> ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix( 172 "profile-guided-section-prefix", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), cl::ZeroOrMore, 173 cl::desc("Use profile info to add section prefix for hot/cold functions")); 174 175 static cl::opt<unsigned> FreqRatioToSkipMerge( 176 "cgp-freq-ratio-to-skip-merge", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2), 177 cl::desc("Skip merging empty blocks if (frequency of empty block) / " 178 "(frequency of destination block) is greater than this ratio")); 179 180 static cl::opt<bool> ForceSplitStore( 181 "force-split-store", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 182 cl::desc("Force store splitting no matter what the target query says.")); 183 184 static cl::opt<bool> 185 EnableTypePromotionMerge("cgp-type-promotion-merge", cl::Hidden, 186 cl::desc("Enable merging of redundant sexts when one is dominating" 187 " the other."), cl::init(true)); 188 189 static cl::opt<bool> DisableComplexAddrModes( 190 "disable-complex-addr-modes", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 191 cl::desc("Disables combining addressing modes with different parts " 192 "in optimizeMemoryInst.")); 193 194 static cl::opt<bool> 195 AddrSinkNewPhis("addr-sink-new-phis", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 196 cl::desc("Allow creation of Phis in Address sinking.")); 197 198 static cl::opt<bool> 199 AddrSinkNewSelects("addr-sink-new-select", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 200 cl::desc("Allow creation of selects in Address sinking.")); 201 202 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseReg( 203 "addr-sink-combine-base-reg", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 204 cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseReg field in Address sinking.")); 205 206 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseGV( 207 "addr-sink-combine-base-gv", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 208 cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseGV field in Address sinking.")); 209 210 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseOffs( 211 "addr-sink-combine-base-offs", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 212 cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseOffs field in Address sinking.")); 213 214 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineScaledReg( 215 "addr-sink-combine-scaled-reg", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 216 cl::desc("Allow combining of ScaledReg field in Address sinking.")); 217 218 static cl::opt<bool> 219 EnableGEPOffsetSplit("cgp-split-large-offset-gep", cl::Hidden, 220 cl::init(true), 221 cl::desc("Enable splitting large offset of GEP.")); 222 223 namespace { 224 225 enum ExtType { 226 ZeroExtension, // Zero extension has been seen. 227 SignExtension, // Sign extension has been seen. 228 BothExtension // This extension type is used if we saw sext after 229 // ZeroExtension had been set, or if we saw zext after 230 // SignExtension had been set. It makes the type 231 // information of a promoted instruction invalid. 232 }; 233 234 using SetOfInstrs = SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16>; 235 using TypeIsSExt = PointerIntPair<Type *, 2, ExtType>; 236 using InstrToOrigTy = DenseMap<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt>; 237 using SExts = SmallVector<Instruction *, 16>; 238 using ValueToSExts = DenseMap<Value *, SExts>; 239 240 class TypePromotionTransaction; 241 242 class CodeGenPrepare : public FunctionPass { 243 const TargetMachine *TM = nullptr; 244 const TargetSubtargetInfo *SubtargetInfo; 245 const TargetLowering *TLI = nullptr; 246 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI; 247 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI = nullptr; 248 const TargetLibraryInfo *TLInfo; 249 const LoopInfo *LI; 250 std::unique_ptr<BlockFrequencyInfo> BFI; 251 std::unique_ptr<BranchProbabilityInfo> BPI; 252 253 /// As we scan instructions optimizing them, this is the next instruction 254 /// to optimize. Transforms that can invalidate this should update it. 255 BasicBlock::iterator CurInstIterator; 256 257 /// Keeps track of non-local addresses that have been sunk into a block. 258 /// This allows us to avoid inserting duplicate code for blocks with 259 /// multiple load/stores of the same address. The usage of WeakTrackingVH 260 /// enables SunkAddrs to be treated as a cache whose entries can be 261 /// invalidated if a sunken address computation has been erased. 262 ValueMap<Value*, WeakTrackingVH> SunkAddrs; 263 264 /// Keeps track of all instructions inserted for the current function. 265 SetOfInstrs InsertedInsts; 266 267 /// Keeps track of the type of the related instruction before their 268 /// promotion for the current function. 269 InstrToOrigTy PromotedInsts; 270 271 /// Keep track of instructions removed during promotion. 272 SetOfInstrs RemovedInsts; 273 274 /// Keep track of sext chains based on their initial value. 275 DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *> SeenChainsForSExt; 276 277 /// Keep track of GEPs accessing the same data structures such as structs or 278 /// arrays that are candidates to be split later because of their large 279 /// size. 280 MapVector< 281 AssertingVH<Value>, 282 SmallVector<std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t>, 32>> 283 LargeOffsetGEPMap; 284 285 /// Keep track of new GEP base after splitting the GEPs having large offset. 286 SmallSet<AssertingVH<Value>, 2> NewGEPBases; 287 288 /// Map serial numbers to Large offset GEPs. 289 DenseMap<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int> LargeOffsetGEPID; 290 291 /// Keep track of SExt promoted. 292 ValueToSExts ValToSExtendedUses; 293 294 /// True if optimizing for size. 295 bool OptSize; 296 297 /// DataLayout for the Function being processed. 298 const DataLayout *DL = nullptr; 299 300 public: 301 static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid 302 303 CodeGenPrepare() : FunctionPass(ID) { 304 initializeCodeGenPreparePass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry()); 305 } 306 307 bool runOnFunction(Function &F) override; 308 309 StringRef getPassName() const override { return "CodeGen Prepare"; } 310 311 void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const override { 312 // FIXME: When we can selectively preserve passes, preserve the domtree. 313 AU.addRequired<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>(); 314 AU.addRequired<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>(); 315 AU.addRequired<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>(); 316 AU.addRequired<LoopInfoWrapperPass>(); 317 } 318 319 private: 320 template <typename F> 321 void resetIteratorIfInvalidatedWhileCalling(BasicBlock *BB, F f) { 322 // Substituting can cause recursive simplifications, which can invalidate 323 // our iterator. Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case this 324 // happens. 325 Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator; 326 WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue); 327 328 f(); 329 330 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the 331 // start of the block. 332 if (IterHandle != CurValue) { 333 CurInstIterator = BB->begin(); 334 SunkAddrs.clear(); 335 } 336 } 337 338 bool eliminateFallThrough(Function &F); 339 bool eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F); 340 BasicBlock *findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB); 341 bool canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, const BasicBlock *DestBB) const; 342 void eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB); 343 bool isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *DestBB, 344 bool isPreheader); 345 bool optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, DominatorTree &DT, bool &ModifiedDT); 346 bool optimizeInst(Instruction *I, DominatorTree &DT, bool &ModifiedDT); 347 bool optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr, 348 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace); 349 bool optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS); 350 bool optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool &ModifiedDT); 351 bool optimizeExt(Instruction *&I); 352 bool optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I); 353 bool optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *Load); 354 bool optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI, bool &ModifiedDT); 355 bool optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI); 356 bool optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *SI); 357 bool optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst); 358 bool dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB, bool &ModifiedDT); 359 bool placeDbgValues(Function &F); 360 bool canFormExtLd(const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts, 361 LoadInst *&LI, Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted); 362 bool tryToPromoteExts(TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 363 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts, 364 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts, 365 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0); 366 bool mergeSExts(Function &F, DominatorTree &DT); 367 bool splitLargeGEPOffsets(); 368 bool performAddressTypePromotion( 369 Instruction *&Inst, 370 bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader, 371 bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 372 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts); 373 bool splitBranchCondition(Function &F, bool &ModifiedDT); 374 bool simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I); 375 376 bool tryToSinkFreeOperands(Instruction *I); 377 bool replaceMathCmpWithIntrinsic(BinaryOperator *BO, CmpInst *Cmp, 378 Intrinsic::ID IID, DominatorTree &DT); 379 bool optimizeCmp(CmpInst *Cmp, DominatorTree &DT, bool &ModifiedDT); 380 bool combineToUSubWithOverflow(CmpInst *Cmp, DominatorTree &DT, 381 bool &ModifiedDT); 382 bool combineToUAddWithOverflow(CmpInst *Cmp, DominatorTree &DT, 383 bool &ModifiedDT); 384 }; 385 386 } // end anonymous namespace 387 388 char CodeGenPrepare::ID = 0; 389 390 INITIALIZE_PASS_BEGIN(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE, 391 "Optimize for code generation", false, false) 392 INITIALIZE_PASS_DEPENDENCY(ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass) 393 INITIALIZE_PASS_END(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE, 394 "Optimize for code generation", false, false) 395 396 FunctionPass *llvm::createCodeGenPreparePass() { return new CodeGenPrepare(); } 397 398 bool CodeGenPrepare::runOnFunction(Function &F) { 399 if (skipFunction(F)) 400 return false; 401 402 DL = &F.getParent()->getDataLayout(); 403 404 bool EverMadeChange = false; 405 // Clear per function information. 406 InsertedInsts.clear(); 407 PromotedInsts.clear(); 408 409 if (auto *TPC = getAnalysisIfAvailable<TargetPassConfig>()) { 410 TM = &TPC->getTM<TargetMachine>(); 411 SubtargetInfo = TM->getSubtargetImpl(F); 412 TLI = SubtargetInfo->getTargetLowering(); 413 TRI = SubtargetInfo->getRegisterInfo(); 414 } 415 TLInfo = &getAnalysis<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>().getTLI(); 416 TTI = &getAnalysis<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>().getTTI(F); 417 LI = &getAnalysis<LoopInfoWrapperPass>().getLoopInfo(); 418 BPI.reset(new BranchProbabilityInfo(F, *LI)); 419 BFI.reset(new BlockFrequencyInfo(F, *BPI, *LI)); 420 OptSize = F.optForSize(); 421 422 ProfileSummaryInfo *PSI = 423 &getAnalysis<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>().getPSI(); 424 if (ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix) { 425 if (PSI->isFunctionHotInCallGraph(&F, *BFI)) 426 F.setSectionPrefix(".hot"); 427 else if (PSI->isFunctionColdInCallGraph(&F, *BFI)) 428 F.setSectionPrefix(".unlikely"); 429 } 430 431 /// This optimization identifies DIV instructions that can be 432 /// profitably bypassed and carried out with a shorter, faster divide. 433 if (!OptSize && !PSI->hasHugeWorkingSetSize() && TLI && 434 TLI->isSlowDivBypassed()) { 435 const DenseMap<unsigned int, unsigned int> &BypassWidths = 436 TLI->getBypassSlowDivWidths(); 437 BasicBlock* BB = &*F.begin(); 438 while (BB != nullptr) { 439 // bypassSlowDivision may create new BBs, but we don't want to reapply the 440 // optimization to those blocks. 441 BasicBlock* Next = BB->getNextNode(); 442 EverMadeChange |= bypassSlowDivision(BB, BypassWidths); 443 BB = Next; 444 } 445 } 446 447 // Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes and an 448 // unconditional branch. 449 EverMadeChange |= eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(F); 450 451 bool ModifiedDT = false; 452 if (!DisableBranchOpts) 453 EverMadeChange |= splitBranchCondition(F, ModifiedDT); 454 455 // Split some critical edges where one of the sources is an indirect branch, 456 // to help generate sane code for PHIs involving such edges. 457 EverMadeChange |= SplitIndirectBrCriticalEdges(F); 458 459 bool MadeChange = true; 460 while (MadeChange) { 461 MadeChange = false; 462 DominatorTree DT(F); 463 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(); I != F.end(); ) { 464 BasicBlock *BB = &*I++; 465 bool ModifiedDTOnIteration = false; 466 MadeChange |= optimizeBlock(*BB, DT, ModifiedDTOnIteration); 467 468 // Restart BB iteration if the dominator tree of the Function was changed 469 if (ModifiedDTOnIteration) 470 break; 471 } 472 if (EnableTypePromotionMerge && !ValToSExtendedUses.empty()) 473 MadeChange |= mergeSExts(F, DT); 474 if (!LargeOffsetGEPMap.empty()) 475 MadeChange |= splitLargeGEPOffsets(); 476 477 // Really free removed instructions during promotion. 478 for (Instruction *I : RemovedInsts) 479 I->deleteValue(); 480 481 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange; 482 SeenChainsForSExt.clear(); 483 ValToSExtendedUses.clear(); 484 RemovedInsts.clear(); 485 LargeOffsetGEPMap.clear(); 486 LargeOffsetGEPID.clear(); 487 } 488 489 SunkAddrs.clear(); 490 491 if (!DisableBranchOpts) { 492 MadeChange = false; 493 // Use a set vector to get deterministic iteration order. The order the 494 // blocks are removed may affect whether or not PHI nodes in successors 495 // are removed. 496 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 8> WorkList; 497 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) { 498 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 2> Successors(succ_begin(&BB), succ_end(&BB)); 499 MadeChange |= ConstantFoldTerminator(&BB, true); 500 if (!MadeChange) continue; 501 502 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator 503 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II) 504 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II)) 505 WorkList.insert(*II); 506 } 507 508 // Delete the dead blocks and any of their dead successors. 509 MadeChange |= !WorkList.empty(); 510 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 511 BasicBlock *BB = WorkList.pop_back_val(); 512 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 2> Successors(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB)); 513 514 DeleteDeadBlock(BB); 515 516 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator 517 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II) 518 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II)) 519 WorkList.insert(*II); 520 } 521 522 // Merge pairs of basic blocks with unconditional branches, connected by 523 // a single edge. 524 if (EverMadeChange || MadeChange) 525 MadeChange |= eliminateFallThrough(F); 526 527 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange; 528 } 529 530 if (!DisableGCOpts) { 531 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Statepoints; 532 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) 533 for (Instruction &I : BB) 534 if (isStatepoint(I)) 535 Statepoints.push_back(&I); 536 for (auto &I : Statepoints) 537 EverMadeChange |= simplifyOffsetableRelocate(*I); 538 } 539 540 // Do this last to clean up use-before-def scenarios introduced by other 541 // preparatory transforms. 542 EverMadeChange |= placeDbgValues(F); 543 544 return EverMadeChange; 545 } 546 547 /// Merge basic blocks which are connected by a single edge, where one of the 548 /// basic blocks has a single successor pointing to the other basic block, 549 /// which has a single predecessor. 550 bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateFallThrough(Function &F) { 551 bool Changed = false; 552 // Scan all of the blocks in the function, except for the entry block. 553 // Use a temporary array to avoid iterator being invalidated when 554 // deleting blocks. 555 SmallVector<WeakTrackingVH, 16> Blocks; 556 for (auto &Block : llvm::make_range(std::next(F.begin()), F.end())) 557 Blocks.push_back(&Block); 558 559 for (auto &Block : Blocks) { 560 auto *BB = cast_or_null<BasicBlock>(Block); 561 if (!BB) 562 continue; 563 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial 564 // edge, just collapse it. 565 BasicBlock *SinglePred = BB->getSinglePredecessor(); 566 567 // Don't merge if BB's address is taken. 568 if (!SinglePred || SinglePred == BB || BB->hasAddressTaken()) continue; 569 570 BranchInst *Term = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(SinglePred->getTerminator()); 571 if (Term && !Term->isConditional()) { 572 Changed = true; 573 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "To merge:\n" << *BB << "\n\n\n"); 574 575 // Merge BB into SinglePred and delete it. 576 MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB); 577 } 578 } 579 return Changed; 580 } 581 582 /// Find a destination block from BB if BB is mergeable empty block. 583 BasicBlock *CodeGenPrepare::findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) { 584 // If this block doesn't end with an uncond branch, ignore it. 585 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator()); 586 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional()) 587 return nullptr; 588 589 // If the instruction before the branch (skipping debug info) isn't a phi 590 // node, then other stuff is happening here. 591 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BI->getIterator(); 592 if (BBI != BB->begin()) { 593 --BBI; 594 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) { 595 if (BBI == BB->begin()) 596 break; 597 --BBI; 598 } 599 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI) && !isa<PHINode>(BBI)) 600 return nullptr; 601 } 602 603 // Do not break infinite loops. 604 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0); 605 if (DestBB == BB) 606 return nullptr; 607 608 if (!canMergeBlocks(BB, DestBB)) 609 DestBB = nullptr; 610 611 return DestBB; 612 } 613 614 /// Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes, debug info directives, and an 615 /// unconditional branch. Passes before isel (e.g. LSR/loopsimplify) often split 616 /// edges in ways that are non-optimal for isel. Start by eliminating these 617 /// blocks so we can split them the way we want them. 618 bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F) { 619 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preheaders; 620 SmallVector<Loop *, 16> LoopList(LI->begin(), LI->end()); 621 while (!LoopList.empty()) { 622 Loop *L = LoopList.pop_back_val(); 623 LoopList.insert(LoopList.end(), L->begin(), L->end()); 624 if (BasicBlock *Preheader = L->getLoopPreheader()) 625 Preheaders.insert(Preheader); 626 } 627 628 bool MadeChange = false; 629 // Copy blocks into a temporary array to avoid iterator invalidation issues 630 // as we remove them. 631 // Note that this intentionally skips the entry block. 632 SmallVector<WeakTrackingVH, 16> Blocks; 633 for (auto &Block : llvm::make_range(std::next(F.begin()), F.end())) 634 Blocks.push_back(&Block); 635 636 for (auto &Block : Blocks) { 637 BasicBlock *BB = cast_or_null<BasicBlock>(Block); 638 if (!BB) 639 continue; 640 BasicBlock *DestBB = findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BB); 641 if (!DestBB || 642 !isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BB, DestBB, Preheaders.count(BB))) 643 continue; 644 645 eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BB); 646 MadeChange = true; 647 } 648 return MadeChange; 649 } 650 651 bool CodeGenPrepare::isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB, 652 BasicBlock *DestBB, 653 bool isPreheader) { 654 // Do not delete loop preheaders if doing so would create a critical edge. 655 // Loop preheaders can be good locations to spill registers. If the 656 // preheader is deleted and we create a critical edge, registers may be 657 // spilled in the loop body instead. 658 if (!DisablePreheaderProtect && isPreheader && 659 !(BB->getSinglePredecessor() && 660 BB->getSinglePredecessor()->getSingleSuccessor())) 661 return false; 662 663 // Skip merging if the block's successor is also a successor to any callbr 664 // that leads to this block. 665 // FIXME: Is this really needed? Is this a correctness issue? 666 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) { 667 if (auto *CBI = dyn_cast<CallBrInst>((*PI)->getTerminator())) 668 for (unsigned i = 0, e = CBI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i) 669 if (DestBB == CBI->getSuccessor(i)) 670 return false; 671 } 672 673 // Try to skip merging if the unique predecessor of BB is terminated by a 674 // switch or indirect branch instruction, and BB is used as an incoming block 675 // of PHIs in DestBB. In such case, merging BB and DestBB would cause ISel to 676 // add COPY instructions in the predecessor of BB instead of BB (if it is not 677 // merged). Note that the critical edge created by merging such blocks wont be 678 // split in MachineSink because the jump table is not analyzable. By keeping 679 // such empty block (BB), ISel will place COPY instructions in BB, not in the 680 // predecessor of BB. 681 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getUniquePredecessor(); 682 if (!Pred || 683 !(isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()) || 684 isa<IndirectBrInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))) 685 return true; 686 687 if (BB->getTerminator() != BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) 688 return true; 689 690 // We use a simple cost heuristic which determine skipping merging is 691 // profitable if the cost of skipping merging is less than the cost of 692 // merging : Cost(skipping merging) < Cost(merging BB), where the 693 // Cost(skipping merging) is Freq(BB) * (Cost(Copy) + Cost(Branch)), and 694 // the Cost(merging BB) is Freq(Pred) * Cost(Copy). 695 // Assuming Cost(Copy) == Cost(Branch), we could simplify it to : 696 // Freq(Pred) / Freq(BB) > 2. 697 // Note that if there are multiple empty blocks sharing the same incoming 698 // value for the PHIs in the DestBB, we consider them together. In such 699 // case, Cost(merging BB) will be the sum of their frequencies. 700 701 if (!isa<PHINode>(DestBB->begin())) 702 return true; 703 704 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SameIncomingValueBBs; 705 706 // Find all other incoming blocks from which incoming values of all PHIs in 707 // DestBB are the same as the ones from BB. 708 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(DestBB), E = pred_end(DestBB); PI != E; 709 ++PI) { 710 BasicBlock *DestBBPred = *PI; 711 if (DestBBPred == BB) 712 continue; 713 714 if (llvm::all_of(DestBB->phis(), [&](const PHINode &DestPN) { 715 return DestPN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == 716 DestPN.getIncomingValueForBlock(DestBBPred); 717 })) 718 SameIncomingValueBBs.insert(DestBBPred); 719 } 720 721 // See if all BB's incoming values are same as the value from Pred. In this 722 // case, no reason to skip merging because COPYs are expected to be place in 723 // Pred already. 724 if (SameIncomingValueBBs.count(Pred)) 725 return true; 726 727 BlockFrequency PredFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(Pred); 728 BlockFrequency BBFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(BB); 729 730 for (auto SameValueBB : SameIncomingValueBBs) 731 if (SameValueBB->getUniquePredecessor() == Pred && 732 DestBB == findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(SameValueBB)) 733 BBFreq += BFI->getBlockFreq(SameValueBB); 734 735 return PredFreq.getFrequency() <= 736 BBFreq.getFrequency() * FreqRatioToSkipMerge; 737 } 738 739 /// Return true if we can merge BB into DestBB if there is a single 740 /// unconditional branch between them, and BB contains no other non-phi 741 /// instructions. 742 bool CodeGenPrepare::canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, 743 const BasicBlock *DestBB) const { 744 // We only want to eliminate blocks whose phi nodes are used by phi nodes in 745 // the successor. If there are more complex condition (e.g. preheaders), 746 // don't mess around with them. 747 for (const PHINode &PN : BB->phis()) { 748 for (const User *U : PN.users()) { 749 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 750 if (UI->getParent() != DestBB || !isa<PHINode>(UI)) 751 return false; 752 // If User is inside DestBB block and it is a PHINode then check 753 // incoming value. If incoming value is not from BB then this is 754 // a complex condition (e.g. preheaders) we want to avoid here. 755 if (UI->getParent() == DestBB) { 756 if (const PHINode *UPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI)) 757 for (unsigned I = 0, E = UPN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) { 758 Instruction *Insn = dyn_cast<Instruction>(UPN->getIncomingValue(I)); 759 if (Insn && Insn->getParent() == BB && 760 Insn->getParent() != UPN->getIncomingBlock(I)) 761 return false; 762 } 763 } 764 } 765 } 766 767 // If BB and DestBB contain any common predecessors, then the phi nodes in BB 768 // and DestBB may have conflicting incoming values for the block. If so, we 769 // can't merge the block. 770 const PHINode *DestBBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(DestBB->begin()); 771 if (!DestBBPN) return true; // no conflict. 772 773 // Collect the preds of BB. 774 SmallPtrSet<const BasicBlock*, 16> BBPreds; 775 if (const PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) { 776 // It is faster to get preds from a PHI than with pred_iterator. 777 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) 778 BBPreds.insert(BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i)); 779 } else { 780 BBPreds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB)); 781 } 782 783 // Walk the preds of DestBB. 784 for (unsigned i = 0, e = DestBBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) { 785 BasicBlock *Pred = DestBBPN->getIncomingBlock(i); 786 if (BBPreds.count(Pred)) { // Common predecessor? 787 for (const PHINode &PN : DestBB->phis()) { 788 const Value *V1 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred); 789 const Value *V2 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB); 790 791 // If V2 is a phi node in BB, look up what the mapped value will be. 792 if (const PHINode *V2PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V2)) 793 if (V2PN->getParent() == BB) 794 V2 = V2PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred); 795 796 // If there is a conflict, bail out. 797 if (V1 != V2) return false; 798 } 799 } 800 } 801 802 return true; 803 } 804 805 /// Eliminate a basic block that has only phi's and an unconditional branch in 806 /// it. 807 void CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) { 808 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator()); 809 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0); 810 811 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "MERGING MOSTLY EMPTY BLOCKS - BEFORE:\n" 812 << *BB << *DestBB); 813 814 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial edge, 815 // just collapse it. 816 if (BasicBlock *SinglePred = DestBB->getSinglePredecessor()) { 817 if (SinglePred != DestBB) { 818 assert(SinglePred == BB && 819 "Single predecessor not the same as predecessor"); 820 // Merge DestBB into SinglePred/BB and delete it. 821 MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(DestBB); 822 // Note: BB(=SinglePred) will not be deleted on this path. 823 // DestBB(=its single successor) is the one that was deleted. 824 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *SinglePred << "\n\n\n"); 825 return; 826 } 827 } 828 829 // Otherwise, we have multiple predecessors of BB. Update the PHIs in DestBB 830 // to handle the new incoming edges it is about to have. 831 for (PHINode &PN : DestBB->phis()) { 832 // Remove the incoming value for BB, and remember it. 833 Value *InVal = PN.removeIncomingValue(BB, false); 834 835 // Two options: either the InVal is a phi node defined in BB or it is some 836 // value that dominates BB. 837 PHINode *InValPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(InVal); 838 if (InValPhi && InValPhi->getParent() == BB) { 839 // Add all of the input values of the input PHI as inputs of this phi. 840 for (unsigned i = 0, e = InValPhi->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) 841 PN.addIncoming(InValPhi->getIncomingValue(i), 842 InValPhi->getIncomingBlock(i)); 843 } else { 844 // Otherwise, add one instance of the dominating value for each edge that 845 // we will be adding. 846 if (PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) { 847 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) 848 PN.addIncoming(InVal, BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i)); 849 } else { 850 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) 851 PN.addIncoming(InVal, *PI); 852 } 853 } 854 } 855 856 // The PHIs are now updated, change everything that refers to BB to use 857 // DestBB and remove BB. 858 BB->replaceAllUsesWith(DestBB); 859 BB->eraseFromParent(); 860 ++NumBlocksElim; 861 862 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n"); 863 } 864 865 // Computes a map of base pointer relocation instructions to corresponding 866 // derived pointer relocation instructions given a vector of all relocate calls 867 static void computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap( 868 const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &AllRelocateCalls, 869 DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>> 870 &RelocateInstMap) { 871 // Collect information in two maps: one primarily for locating the base object 872 // while filling the second map; the second map is the final structure holding 873 // a mapping between Base and corresponding Derived relocate calls 874 DenseMap<std::pair<unsigned, unsigned>, GCRelocateInst *> RelocateIdxMap; 875 for (auto *ThisRelocate : AllRelocateCalls) { 876 auto K = std::make_pair(ThisRelocate->getBasePtrIndex(), 877 ThisRelocate->getDerivedPtrIndex()); 878 RelocateIdxMap.insert(std::make_pair(K, ThisRelocate)); 879 } 880 for (auto &Item : RelocateIdxMap) { 881 std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> Key = Item.first; 882 if (Key.first == Key.second) 883 // Base relocation: nothing to insert 884 continue; 885 886 GCRelocateInst *I = Item.second; 887 auto BaseKey = std::make_pair(Key.first, Key.first); 888 889 // We're iterating over RelocateIdxMap so we cannot modify it. 890 auto MaybeBase = RelocateIdxMap.find(BaseKey); 891 if (MaybeBase == RelocateIdxMap.end()) 892 // TODO: We might want to insert a new base object relocate and gep off 893 // that, if there are enough derived object relocates. 894 continue; 895 896 RelocateInstMap[MaybeBase->second].push_back(I); 897 } 898 } 899 900 // Accepts a GEP and extracts the operands into a vector provided they're all 901 // small integer constants 902 static bool getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(GetElementPtrInst *GEP, 903 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &OffsetV) { 904 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) { 905 // Only accept small constant integer operands 906 auto Op = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(i)); 907 if (!Op || Op->getZExtValue() > 20) 908 return false; 909 } 910 911 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) 912 OffsetV.push_back(GEP->getOperand(i)); 913 return true; 914 } 915 916 // Takes a RelocatedBase (base pointer relocation instruction) and Targets to 917 // replace, computes a replacement, and affects it. 918 static bool 919 simplifyRelocatesOffABase(GCRelocateInst *RelocatedBase, 920 const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &Targets) { 921 bool MadeChange = false; 922 // We must ensure the relocation of derived pointer is defined after 923 // relocation of base pointer. If we find a relocation corresponding to base 924 // defined earlier than relocation of base then we move relocation of base 925 // right before found relocation. We consider only relocation in the same 926 // basic block as relocation of base. Relocations from other basic block will 927 // be skipped by optimization and we do not care about them. 928 for (auto R = RelocatedBase->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt(); 929 &*R != RelocatedBase; ++R) 930 if (auto RI = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(R)) 931 if (RI->getStatepoint() == RelocatedBase->getStatepoint()) 932 if (RI->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex()) { 933 RelocatedBase->moveBefore(RI); 934 break; 935 } 936 937 for (GCRelocateInst *ToReplace : Targets) { 938 assert(ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex() && 939 "Not relocating a derived object of the original base object"); 940 if (ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == ToReplace->getDerivedPtrIndex()) { 941 // A duplicate relocate call. TODO: coalesce duplicates. 942 continue; 943 } 944 945 if (RelocatedBase->getParent() != ToReplace->getParent()) { 946 // Base and derived relocates are in different basic blocks. 947 // In this case transform is only valid when base dominates derived 948 // relocate. However it would be too expensive to check dominance 949 // for each such relocate, so we skip the whole transformation. 950 continue; 951 } 952 953 Value *Base = ToReplace->getBasePtr(); 954 auto Derived = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(ToReplace->getDerivedPtr()); 955 if (!Derived || Derived->getPointerOperand() != Base) 956 continue; 957 958 SmallVector<Value *, 2> OffsetV; 959 if (!getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(Derived, OffsetV)) 960 continue; 961 962 // Create a Builder and replace the target callsite with a gep 963 assert(RelocatedBase->getNextNode() && 964 "Should always have one since it's not a terminator"); 965 966 // Insert after RelocatedBase 967 IRBuilder<> Builder(RelocatedBase->getNextNode()); 968 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(ToReplace->getDebugLoc()); 969 970 // If gc_relocate does not match the actual type, cast it to the right type. 971 // In theory, there must be a bitcast after gc_relocate if the type does not 972 // match, and we should reuse it to get the derived pointer. But it could be 973 // cases like this: 974 // bb1: 975 // ... 976 // %g1 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...) 977 // br label %merge 978 // 979 // bb2: 980 // ... 981 // %g2 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...) 982 // br label %merge 983 // 984 // merge: 985 // %p1 = phi i8 addrspace(1)* [ %g1, %bb1 ], [ %g2, %bb2 ] 986 // %cast = bitcast i8 addrspace(1)* %p1 in to i32 addrspace(1)* 987 // 988 // In this case, we can not find the bitcast any more. So we insert a new bitcast 989 // no matter there is already one or not. In this way, we can handle all cases, and 990 // the extra bitcast should be optimized away in later passes. 991 Value *ActualRelocatedBase = RelocatedBase; 992 if (RelocatedBase->getType() != Base->getType()) { 993 ActualRelocatedBase = 994 Builder.CreateBitCast(RelocatedBase, Base->getType()); 995 } 996 Value *Replacement = Builder.CreateGEP( 997 Derived->getSourceElementType(), ActualRelocatedBase, makeArrayRef(OffsetV)); 998 Replacement->takeName(ToReplace); 999 // If the newly generated derived pointer's type does not match the original derived 1000 // pointer's type, cast the new derived pointer to match it. Same reasoning as above. 1001 Value *ActualReplacement = Replacement; 1002 if (Replacement->getType() != ToReplace->getType()) { 1003 ActualReplacement = 1004 Builder.CreateBitCast(Replacement, ToReplace->getType()); 1005 } 1006 ToReplace->replaceAllUsesWith(ActualReplacement); 1007 ToReplace->eraseFromParent(); 1008 1009 MadeChange = true; 1010 } 1011 return MadeChange; 1012 } 1013 1014 // Turns this: 1015 // 1016 // %base = ... 1017 // %ptr = gep %base + 15 1018 // %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr) 1019 // %base' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4) 1020 // %ptr' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 5) 1021 // %val = load %ptr' 1022 // 1023 // into this: 1024 // 1025 // %base = ... 1026 // %ptr = gep %base + 15 1027 // %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr) 1028 // %base' = gc.relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4) 1029 // %ptr' = gep %base' + 15 1030 // %val = load %ptr' 1031 bool CodeGenPrepare::simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I) { 1032 bool MadeChange = false; 1033 SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2> AllRelocateCalls; 1034 1035 for (auto *U : I.users()) 1036 if (GCRelocateInst *Relocate = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(U)) 1037 // Collect all the relocate calls associated with a statepoint 1038 AllRelocateCalls.push_back(Relocate); 1039 1040 // We need atleast one base pointer relocation + one derived pointer 1041 // relocation to mangle 1042 if (AllRelocateCalls.size() < 2) 1043 return false; 1044 1045 // RelocateInstMap is a mapping from the base relocate instruction to the 1046 // corresponding derived relocate instructions 1047 DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>> RelocateInstMap; 1048 computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(AllRelocateCalls, RelocateInstMap); 1049 if (RelocateInstMap.empty()) 1050 return false; 1051 1052 for (auto &Item : RelocateInstMap) 1053 // Item.first is the RelocatedBase to offset against 1054 // Item.second is the vector of Targets to replace 1055 MadeChange = simplifyRelocatesOffABase(Item.first, Item.second); 1056 return MadeChange; 1057 } 1058 1059 /// Sink the specified cast instruction into its user blocks. 1060 static bool SinkCast(CastInst *CI) { 1061 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent(); 1062 1063 /// InsertedCasts - Only insert a cast in each block once. 1064 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CastInst*> InsertedCasts; 1065 1066 bool MadeChange = false; 1067 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end(); 1068 UI != E; ) { 1069 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1070 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1071 1072 // Figure out which BB this cast is used in. For PHI's this is the 1073 // appropriate predecessor block. 1074 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1075 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User)) { 1076 UserBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(TheUse); 1077 } 1078 1079 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1080 ++UI; 1081 1082 // The first insertion point of a block containing an EH pad is after the 1083 // pad. If the pad is the user, we cannot sink the cast past the pad. 1084 if (User->isEHPad()) 1085 continue; 1086 1087 // If the block selected to receive the cast is an EH pad that does not 1088 // allow non-PHI instructions before the terminator, we can't sink the 1089 // cast. 1090 if (UserBB->getTerminator()->isEHPad()) 1091 continue; 1092 1093 // If this user is in the same block as the cast, don't change the cast. 1094 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 1095 1096 // If we have already inserted a cast into this block, use it. 1097 CastInst *&InsertedCast = InsertedCasts[UserBB]; 1098 1099 if (!InsertedCast) { 1100 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1101 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 1102 InsertedCast = CastInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getOperand(0), 1103 CI->getType(), "", &*InsertPt); 1104 InsertedCast->setDebugLoc(CI->getDebugLoc()); 1105 } 1106 1107 // Replace a use of the cast with a use of the new cast. 1108 TheUse = InsertedCast; 1109 MadeChange = true; 1110 ++NumCastUses; 1111 } 1112 1113 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cast. 1114 if (CI->use_empty()) { 1115 salvageDebugInfo(*CI); 1116 CI->eraseFromParent(); 1117 MadeChange = true; 1118 } 1119 1120 return MadeChange; 1121 } 1122 1123 /// If the specified cast instruction is a noop copy (e.g. it's casting from 1124 /// one pointer type to another, i32->i8 on PPC), sink it into user blocks to 1125 /// reduce the number of virtual registers that must be created and coalesced. 1126 /// 1127 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1128 static bool OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CastInst *CI, const TargetLowering &TLI, 1129 const DataLayout &DL) { 1130 // Sink only "cheap" (or nop) address-space casts. This is a weaker condition 1131 // than sinking only nop casts, but is helpful on some platforms. 1132 if (auto *ASC = dyn_cast<AddrSpaceCastInst>(CI)) { 1133 if (!TLI.isCheapAddrSpaceCast(ASC->getSrcAddressSpace(), 1134 ASC->getDestAddressSpace())) 1135 return false; 1136 } 1137 1138 // If this is a noop copy, 1139 EVT SrcVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getOperand(0)->getType()); 1140 EVT DstVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getType()); 1141 1142 // This is an fp<->int conversion? 1143 if (SrcVT.isInteger() != DstVT.isInteger()) 1144 return false; 1145 1146 // If this is an extension, it will be a zero or sign extension, which 1147 // isn't a noop. 1148 if (SrcVT.bitsLT(DstVT)) return false; 1149 1150 // If these values will be promoted, find out what they will be promoted 1151 // to. This helps us consider truncates on PPC as noop copies when they 1152 // are. 1153 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), SrcVT) == 1154 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger) 1155 SrcVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), SrcVT); 1156 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), DstVT) == 1157 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger) 1158 DstVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), DstVT); 1159 1160 // If, after promotion, these are the same types, this is a noop copy. 1161 if (SrcVT != DstVT) 1162 return false; 1163 1164 return SinkCast(CI); 1165 } 1166 1167 bool CodeGenPrepare::replaceMathCmpWithIntrinsic(BinaryOperator *BO, 1168 CmpInst *Cmp, 1169 Intrinsic::ID IID, 1170 DominatorTree &DT) { 1171 // We allow matching the canonical IR (add X, C) back to (usubo X, -C). 1172 Value *Arg0 = BO->getOperand(0); 1173 Value *Arg1 = BO->getOperand(1); 1174 if (BO->getOpcode() == Instruction::Add && 1175 IID == Intrinsic::usub_with_overflow) { 1176 assert(isa<Constant>(Arg1) && "Unexpected input for usubo"); 1177 Arg1 = ConstantExpr::getNeg(cast<Constant>(Arg1)); 1178 } 1179 1180 Instruction *InsertPt; 1181 if (BO->hasOneUse() && BO->user_back() == Cmp) { 1182 // If the math is only used by the compare, insert at the compare to keep 1183 // the condition in the same block as its users. (CGP aggressively sinks 1184 // compares to help out SDAG.) 1185 InsertPt = Cmp; 1186 } else { 1187 // The math and compare may be independent instructions. Check dominance to 1188 // determine the insertion point for the intrinsic. 1189 bool MathDominates = DT.dominates(BO, Cmp); 1190 if (!MathDominates && !DT.dominates(Cmp, BO)) 1191 return false; 1192 1193 BasicBlock *MathBB = BO->getParent(), *CmpBB = Cmp->getParent(); 1194 if (MathBB != CmpBB) { 1195 // Avoid hoisting an extra op into a dominating block and creating a 1196 // potentially longer critical path. 1197 if (!MathDominates) 1198 return false; 1199 // Check that the insertion doesn't create a value that is live across 1200 // more than two blocks, so to minimise the increase in register pressure. 1201 BasicBlock *Dominator = MathDominates ? MathBB : CmpBB; 1202 BasicBlock *Dominated = MathDominates ? CmpBB : MathBB; 1203 auto Successors = successors(Dominator); 1204 if (llvm::find(Successors, Dominated) == Successors.end()) 1205 return false; 1206 } 1207 1208 InsertPt = MathDominates ? cast<Instruction>(BO) : cast<Instruction>(Cmp); 1209 } 1210 1211 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt); 1212 Value *MathOV = Builder.CreateBinaryIntrinsic(IID, Arg0, Arg1); 1213 Value *Math = Builder.CreateExtractValue(MathOV, 0, "math"); 1214 Value *OV = Builder.CreateExtractValue(MathOV, 1, "ov"); 1215 BO->replaceAllUsesWith(Math); 1216 Cmp->replaceAllUsesWith(OV); 1217 BO->eraseFromParent(); 1218 Cmp->eraseFromParent(); 1219 return true; 1220 } 1221 1222 /// Match special-case patterns that check for unsigned add overflow. 1223 static bool matchUAddWithOverflowConstantEdgeCases(CmpInst *Cmp, 1224 BinaryOperator *&Add) { 1225 // Add = add A, 1; Cmp = icmp eq A,-1 (overflow if A is max val) 1226 // Add = add A,-1; Cmp = icmp ne A, 0 (overflow if A is non-zero) 1227 Value *A = Cmp->getOperand(0), *B = Cmp->getOperand(1); 1228 1229 // We are not expecting non-canonical/degenerate code. Just bail out. 1230 if (isa<Constant>(A)) 1231 return false; 1232 1233 ICmpInst::Predicate Pred = Cmp->getPredicate(); 1234 if (Pred == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ && match(B, m_AllOnes())) 1235 B = ConstantInt::get(B->getType(), 1); 1236 else if (Pred == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE && match(B, m_ZeroInt())) 1237 B = ConstantInt::get(B->getType(), -1); 1238 else 1239 return false; 1240 1241 // Check the users of the variable operand of the compare looking for an add 1242 // with the adjusted constant. 1243 for (User *U : A->users()) { 1244 if (match(U, m_Add(m_Specific(A), m_Specific(B)))) { 1245 Add = cast<BinaryOperator>(U); 1246 return true; 1247 } 1248 } 1249 return false; 1250 } 1251 1252 /// Try to combine the compare into a call to the llvm.uadd.with.overflow 1253 /// intrinsic. Return true if any changes were made. 1254 bool CodeGenPrepare::combineToUAddWithOverflow(CmpInst *Cmp, DominatorTree &DT, 1255 bool &ModifiedDT) { 1256 Value *A, *B; 1257 BinaryOperator *Add; 1258 if (!match(Cmp, m_UAddWithOverflow(m_Value(A), m_Value(B), m_BinOp(Add)))) 1259 if (!matchUAddWithOverflowConstantEdgeCases(Cmp, Add)) 1260 return false; 1261 1262 if (!TLI->shouldFormOverflowOp(ISD::UADDO, 1263 TLI->getValueType(*DL, Add->getType()))) 1264 return false; 1265 1266 // We don't want to move around uses of condition values this late, so we 1267 // check if it is legal to create the call to the intrinsic in the basic 1268 // block containing the icmp. 1269 if (Add->getParent() != Cmp->getParent() && !Add->hasOneUse()) 1270 return false; 1271 1272 if (!replaceMathCmpWithIntrinsic(Add, Cmp, Intrinsic::uadd_with_overflow, DT)) 1273 return false; 1274 1275 // Reset callers - do not crash by iterating over a dead instruction. 1276 ModifiedDT = true; 1277 return true; 1278 } 1279 1280 bool CodeGenPrepare::combineToUSubWithOverflow(CmpInst *Cmp, DominatorTree &DT, 1281 bool &ModifiedDT) { 1282 // We are not expecting non-canonical/degenerate code. Just bail out. 1283 Value *A = Cmp->getOperand(0), *B = Cmp->getOperand(1); 1284 if (isa<Constant>(A) && isa<Constant>(B)) 1285 return false; 1286 1287 // Convert (A u> B) to (A u< B) to simplify pattern matching. 1288 ICmpInst::Predicate Pred = Cmp->getPredicate(); 1289 if (Pred == ICmpInst::ICMP_UGT) { 1290 std::swap(A, B); 1291 Pred = ICmpInst::ICMP_ULT; 1292 } 1293 // Convert special-case: (A == 0) is the same as (A u< 1). 1294 if (Pred == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ && match(B, m_ZeroInt())) { 1295 B = ConstantInt::get(B->getType(), 1); 1296 Pred = ICmpInst::ICMP_ULT; 1297 } 1298 // Convert special-case: (A != 0) is the same as (0 u< A). 1299 if (Pred == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE && match(B, m_ZeroInt())) { 1300 std::swap(A, B); 1301 Pred = ICmpInst::ICMP_ULT; 1302 } 1303 if (Pred != ICmpInst::ICMP_ULT) 1304 return false; 1305 1306 // Walk the users of a variable operand of a compare looking for a subtract or 1307 // add with that same operand. Also match the 2nd operand of the compare to 1308 // the add/sub, but that may be a negated constant operand of an add. 1309 Value *CmpVariableOperand = isa<Constant>(A) ? B : A; 1310 BinaryOperator *Sub = nullptr; 1311 for (User *U : CmpVariableOperand->users()) { 1312 // A - B, A u< B --> usubo(A, B) 1313 if (match(U, m_Sub(m_Specific(A), m_Specific(B)))) { 1314 Sub = cast<BinaryOperator>(U); 1315 break; 1316 } 1317 1318 // A + (-C), A u< C (canonicalized form of (sub A, C)) 1319 const APInt *CmpC, *AddC; 1320 if (match(U, m_Add(m_Specific(A), m_APInt(AddC))) && 1321 match(B, m_APInt(CmpC)) && *AddC == -(*CmpC)) { 1322 Sub = cast<BinaryOperator>(U); 1323 break; 1324 } 1325 } 1326 if (!Sub) 1327 return false; 1328 1329 if (!TLI->shouldFormOverflowOp(ISD::USUBO, 1330 TLI->getValueType(*DL, Sub->getType()))) 1331 return false; 1332 1333 if (!replaceMathCmpWithIntrinsic(Sub, Cmp, Intrinsic::usub_with_overflow, DT)) 1334 return false; 1335 1336 // Reset callers - do not crash by iterating over a dead instruction. 1337 ModifiedDT = true; 1338 return true; 1339 } 1340 1341 /// Sink the given CmpInst into user blocks to reduce the number of virtual 1342 /// registers that must be created and coalesced. This is a clear win except on 1343 /// targets with multiple condition code registers (PowerPC), where it might 1344 /// lose; some adjustment may be wanted there. 1345 /// 1346 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1347 static bool sinkCmpExpression(CmpInst *Cmp, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 1348 if (TLI.hasMultipleConditionRegisters()) 1349 return false; 1350 1351 // Avoid sinking soft-FP comparisons, since this can move them into a loop. 1352 if (TLI.useSoftFloat() && isa<FCmpInst>(Cmp)) 1353 return false; 1354 1355 // Only insert a cmp in each block once. 1356 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CmpInst*> InsertedCmps; 1357 1358 bool MadeChange = false; 1359 for (Value::user_iterator UI = Cmp->user_begin(), E = Cmp->user_end(); 1360 UI != E; ) { 1361 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1362 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1363 1364 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1365 ++UI; 1366 1367 // Don't bother for PHI nodes. 1368 if (isa<PHINode>(User)) 1369 continue; 1370 1371 // Figure out which BB this cmp is used in. 1372 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1373 BasicBlock *DefBB = Cmp->getParent(); 1374 1375 // If this user is in the same block as the cmp, don't change the cmp. 1376 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 1377 1378 // If we have already inserted a cmp into this block, use it. 1379 CmpInst *&InsertedCmp = InsertedCmps[UserBB]; 1380 1381 if (!InsertedCmp) { 1382 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1383 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 1384 InsertedCmp = 1385 CmpInst::Create(Cmp->getOpcode(), Cmp->getPredicate(), 1386 Cmp->getOperand(0), Cmp->getOperand(1), "", 1387 &*InsertPt); 1388 // Propagate the debug info. 1389 InsertedCmp->setDebugLoc(Cmp->getDebugLoc()); 1390 } 1391 1392 // Replace a use of the cmp with a use of the new cmp. 1393 TheUse = InsertedCmp; 1394 MadeChange = true; 1395 ++NumCmpUses; 1396 } 1397 1398 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cmp. 1399 if (Cmp->use_empty()) { 1400 Cmp->eraseFromParent(); 1401 MadeChange = true; 1402 } 1403 1404 return MadeChange; 1405 } 1406 1407 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeCmp(CmpInst *Cmp, DominatorTree &DT, 1408 bool &ModifiedDT) { 1409 if (sinkCmpExpression(Cmp, *TLI)) 1410 return true; 1411 1412 if (combineToUAddWithOverflow(Cmp, DT, ModifiedDT)) 1413 return true; 1414 1415 if (combineToUSubWithOverflow(Cmp, DT, ModifiedDT)) 1416 return true; 1417 1418 return false; 1419 } 1420 1421 /// Duplicate and sink the given 'and' instruction into user blocks where it is 1422 /// used in a compare to allow isel to generate better code for targets where 1423 /// this operation can be combined. 1424 /// 1425 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1426 static bool sinkAndCmp0Expression(Instruction *AndI, 1427 const TargetLowering &TLI, 1428 SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts) { 1429 // Double-check that we're not trying to optimize an instruction that was 1430 // already optimized by some other part of this pass. 1431 assert(!InsertedInsts.count(AndI) && 1432 "Attempting to optimize already optimized and instruction"); 1433 (void) InsertedInsts; 1434 1435 // Nothing to do for single use in same basic block. 1436 if (AndI->hasOneUse() && 1437 AndI->getParent() == cast<Instruction>(*AndI->user_begin())->getParent()) 1438 return false; 1439 1440 // Try to avoid cases where sinking/duplicating is likely to increase register 1441 // pressure. 1442 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(0)) && 1443 !isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(1)) && 1444 AndI->getOperand(0)->hasOneUse() && AndI->getOperand(1)->hasOneUse()) 1445 return false; 1446 1447 for (auto *U : AndI->users()) { 1448 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U); 1449 1450 // Only sink 'and' feeding icmp with 0. 1451 if (!isa<ICmpInst>(User)) 1452 return false; 1453 1454 auto *CmpC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1)); 1455 if (!CmpC || !CmpC->isZero()) 1456 return false; 1457 } 1458 1459 if (!TLI.isMaskAndCmp0FoldingBeneficial(*AndI)) 1460 return false; 1461 1462 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "found 'and' feeding only icmp 0;\n"); 1463 LLVM_DEBUG(AndI->getParent()->dump()); 1464 1465 // Push the 'and' into the same block as the icmp 0. There should only be 1466 // one (icmp (and, 0)) in each block, since CSE/GVN should have removed any 1467 // others, so we don't need to keep track of which BBs we insert into. 1468 for (Value::user_iterator UI = AndI->user_begin(), E = AndI->user_end(); 1469 UI != E; ) { 1470 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1471 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1472 1473 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1474 ++UI; 1475 1476 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "sinking 'and' use: " << *User << "\n"); 1477 1478 // Keep the 'and' in the same place if the use is already in the same block. 1479 Instruction *InsertPt = 1480 User->getParent() == AndI->getParent() ? AndI : User; 1481 Instruction *InsertedAnd = 1482 BinaryOperator::Create(Instruction::And, AndI->getOperand(0), 1483 AndI->getOperand(1), "", InsertPt); 1484 // Propagate the debug info. 1485 InsertedAnd->setDebugLoc(AndI->getDebugLoc()); 1486 1487 // Replace a use of the 'and' with a use of the new 'and'. 1488 TheUse = InsertedAnd; 1489 ++NumAndUses; 1490 LLVM_DEBUG(User->getParent()->dump()); 1491 } 1492 1493 // We removed all uses, nuke the and. 1494 AndI->eraseFromParent(); 1495 return true; 1496 } 1497 1498 /// Check if the candidates could be combined with a shift instruction, which 1499 /// includes: 1500 /// 1. Truncate instruction 1501 /// 2. And instruction and the imm is a mask of the low bits: 1502 /// imm & (imm+1) == 0 1503 static bool isExtractBitsCandidateUse(Instruction *User) { 1504 if (!isa<TruncInst>(User)) { 1505 if (User->getOpcode() != Instruction::And || 1506 !isa<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))) 1507 return false; 1508 1509 const APInt &Cimm = cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))->getValue(); 1510 1511 if ((Cimm & (Cimm + 1)).getBoolValue()) 1512 return false; 1513 } 1514 return true; 1515 } 1516 1517 /// Sink both shift and truncate instruction to the use of truncate's BB. 1518 static bool 1519 SinkShiftAndTruncate(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, Instruction *User, ConstantInt *CI, 1520 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> &InsertedShifts, 1521 const TargetLowering &TLI, const DataLayout &DL) { 1522 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1523 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, CastInst *> InsertedTruncs; 1524 TruncInst *TruncI = dyn_cast<TruncInst>(User); 1525 bool MadeChange = false; 1526 1527 for (Value::user_iterator TruncUI = TruncI->user_begin(), 1528 TruncE = TruncI->user_end(); 1529 TruncUI != TruncE;) { 1530 1531 Use &TruncTheUse = TruncUI.getUse(); 1532 Instruction *TruncUser = cast<Instruction>(*TruncUI); 1533 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1534 1535 ++TruncUI; 1536 1537 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(TruncUser->getOpcode()); 1538 if (!ISDOpcode) 1539 continue; 1540 1541 // If the use is actually a legal node, there will not be an 1542 // implicit truncate. 1543 // FIXME: always querying the result type is just an 1544 // approximation; some nodes' legality is determined by the 1545 // operand or other means. There's no good way to find out though. 1546 if (TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom( 1547 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, TruncUser->getType(), true))) 1548 continue; 1549 1550 // Don't bother for PHI nodes. 1551 if (isa<PHINode>(TruncUser)) 1552 continue; 1553 1554 BasicBlock *TruncUserBB = TruncUser->getParent(); 1555 1556 if (UserBB == TruncUserBB) 1557 continue; 1558 1559 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[TruncUserBB]; 1560 CastInst *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[TruncUserBB]; 1561 1562 if (!InsertedShift && !InsertedTrunc) { 1563 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1564 assert(InsertPt != TruncUserBB->end()); 1565 // Sink the shift 1566 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr) 1567 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1568 "", &*InsertPt); 1569 else 1570 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1571 "", &*InsertPt); 1572 InsertedShift->setDebugLoc(ShiftI->getDebugLoc()); 1573 1574 // Sink the trunc 1575 BasicBlock::iterator TruncInsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1576 TruncInsertPt++; 1577 assert(TruncInsertPt != TruncUserBB->end()); 1578 1579 InsertedTrunc = CastInst::Create(TruncI->getOpcode(), InsertedShift, 1580 TruncI->getType(), "", &*TruncInsertPt); 1581 InsertedTrunc->setDebugLoc(TruncI->getDebugLoc()); 1582 1583 MadeChange = true; 1584 1585 TruncTheUse = InsertedTrunc; 1586 } 1587 } 1588 return MadeChange; 1589 } 1590 1591 /// Sink the shift *right* instruction into user blocks if the uses could 1592 /// potentially be combined with this shift instruction and generate BitExtract 1593 /// instruction. It will only be applied if the architecture supports BitExtract 1594 /// instruction. Here is an example: 1595 /// BB1: 1596 /// %x.extract.shift = lshr i64 %arg1, 32 1597 /// BB2: 1598 /// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift to i16 1599 /// ==> 1600 /// 1601 /// BB2: 1602 /// %x.extract.shift.1 = lshr i64 %arg1, 32 1603 /// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift.1 to i16 1604 /// 1605 /// CodeGen will recognize the pattern in BB2 and generate BitExtract 1606 /// instruction. 1607 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1608 static bool OptimizeExtractBits(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, ConstantInt *CI, 1609 const TargetLowering &TLI, 1610 const DataLayout &DL) { 1611 BasicBlock *DefBB = ShiftI->getParent(); 1612 1613 /// Only insert instructions in each block once. 1614 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> InsertedShifts; 1615 1616 bool shiftIsLegal = TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, ShiftI->getType())); 1617 1618 bool MadeChange = false; 1619 for (Value::user_iterator UI = ShiftI->user_begin(), E = ShiftI->user_end(); 1620 UI != E;) { 1621 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1622 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1623 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1624 ++UI; 1625 1626 // Don't bother for PHI nodes. 1627 if (isa<PHINode>(User)) 1628 continue; 1629 1630 if (!isExtractBitsCandidateUse(User)) 1631 continue; 1632 1633 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1634 1635 if (UserBB == DefBB) { 1636 // If the shift and truncate instruction are in the same BB. The use of 1637 // the truncate(TruncUse) may still introduce another truncate if not 1638 // legal. In this case, we would like to sink both shift and truncate 1639 // instruction to the BB of TruncUse. 1640 // for example: 1641 // BB1: 1642 // i64 shift.result = lshr i64 opnd, imm 1643 // trunc.result = trunc shift.result to i16 1644 // 1645 // BB2: 1646 // ----> We will have an implicit truncate here if the architecture does 1647 // not have i16 compare. 1648 // cmp i16 trunc.result, opnd2 1649 // 1650 if (isa<TruncInst>(User) && shiftIsLegal 1651 // If the type of the truncate is legal, no truncate will be 1652 // introduced in other basic blocks. 1653 && 1654 (!TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, User->getType())))) 1655 MadeChange = 1656 SinkShiftAndTruncate(ShiftI, User, CI, InsertedShifts, TLI, DL); 1657 1658 continue; 1659 } 1660 // If we have already inserted a shift into this block, use it. 1661 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[UserBB]; 1662 1663 if (!InsertedShift) { 1664 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1665 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 1666 1667 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr) 1668 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1669 "", &*InsertPt); 1670 else 1671 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1672 "", &*InsertPt); 1673 InsertedShift->setDebugLoc(ShiftI->getDebugLoc()); 1674 1675 MadeChange = true; 1676 } 1677 1678 // Replace a use of the shift with a use of the new shift. 1679 TheUse = InsertedShift; 1680 } 1681 1682 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shift. 1683 if (ShiftI->use_empty()) { 1684 salvageDebugInfo(*ShiftI); 1685 ShiftI->eraseFromParent(); 1686 } 1687 1688 return MadeChange; 1689 } 1690 1691 /// If counting leading or trailing zeros is an expensive operation and a zero 1692 /// input is defined, add a check for zero to avoid calling the intrinsic. 1693 /// 1694 /// We want to transform: 1695 /// %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 false) 1696 /// 1697 /// into: 1698 /// entry: 1699 /// %cmpz = icmp eq i64 %A, 0 1700 /// br i1 %cmpz, label %cond.end, label %cond.false 1701 /// cond.false: 1702 /// %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 true) 1703 /// br label %cond.end 1704 /// cond.end: 1705 /// %ctz = phi i64 [ 64, %entry ], [ %z, %cond.false ] 1706 /// 1707 /// If the transform is performed, return true and set ModifiedDT to true. 1708 static bool despeculateCountZeros(IntrinsicInst *CountZeros, 1709 const TargetLowering *TLI, 1710 const DataLayout *DL, 1711 bool &ModifiedDT) { 1712 if (!TLI || !DL) 1713 return false; 1714 1715 // If a zero input is undefined, it doesn't make sense to despeculate that. 1716 if (match(CountZeros->getOperand(1), m_One())) 1717 return false; 1718 1719 // If it's cheap to speculate, there's nothing to do. 1720 auto IntrinsicID = CountZeros->getIntrinsicID(); 1721 if ((IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::cttz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCttz()) || 1722 (IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::ctlz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCtlz())) 1723 return false; 1724 1725 // Only handle legal scalar cases. Anything else requires too much work. 1726 Type *Ty = CountZeros->getType(); 1727 unsigned SizeInBits = Ty->getPrimitiveSizeInBits(); 1728 if (Ty->isVectorTy() || SizeInBits > DL->getLargestLegalIntTypeSizeInBits()) 1729 return false; 1730 1731 // The intrinsic will be sunk behind a compare against zero and branch. 1732 BasicBlock *StartBlock = CountZeros->getParent(); 1733 BasicBlock *CallBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(CountZeros, "cond.false"); 1734 1735 // Create another block after the count zero intrinsic. A PHI will be added 1736 // in this block to select the result of the intrinsic or the bit-width 1737 // constant if the input to the intrinsic is zero. 1738 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(CountZeros)); 1739 BasicBlock *EndBlock = CallBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "cond.end"); 1740 1741 // Set up a builder to create a compare, conditional branch, and PHI. 1742 IRBuilder<> Builder(CountZeros->getContext()); 1743 Builder.SetInsertPoint(StartBlock->getTerminator()); 1744 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CountZeros->getDebugLoc()); 1745 1746 // Replace the unconditional branch that was created by the first split with 1747 // a compare against zero and a conditional branch. 1748 Value *Zero = Constant::getNullValue(Ty); 1749 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(CountZeros->getOperand(0), Zero, "cmpz"); 1750 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, EndBlock, CallBlock); 1751 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent(); 1752 1753 // Create a PHI in the end block to select either the output of the intrinsic 1754 // or the bit width of the operand. 1755 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&EndBlock->front()); 1756 PHINode *PN = Builder.CreatePHI(Ty, 2, "ctz"); 1757 CountZeros->replaceAllUsesWith(PN); 1758 Value *BitWidth = Builder.getInt(APInt(SizeInBits, SizeInBits)); 1759 PN->addIncoming(BitWidth, StartBlock); 1760 PN->addIncoming(CountZeros, CallBlock); 1761 1762 // We are explicitly handling the zero case, so we can set the intrinsic's 1763 // undefined zero argument to 'true'. This will also prevent reprocessing the 1764 // intrinsic; we only despeculate when a zero input is defined. 1765 CountZeros->setArgOperand(1, Builder.getTrue()); 1766 ModifiedDT = true; 1767 return true; 1768 } 1769 1770 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool &ModifiedDT) { 1771 BasicBlock *BB = CI->getParent(); 1772 1773 // Lower inline assembly if we can. 1774 // If we found an inline asm expession, and if the target knows how to 1775 // lower it to normal LLVM code, do so now. 1776 if (TLI && isa<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue())) { 1777 if (TLI->ExpandInlineAsm(CI)) { 1778 // Avoid invalidating the iterator. 1779 CurInstIterator = BB->begin(); 1780 // Avoid processing instructions out of order, which could cause 1781 // reuse before a value is defined. 1782 SunkAddrs.clear(); 1783 return true; 1784 } 1785 // Sink address computing for memory operands into the block. 1786 if (optimizeInlineAsmInst(CI)) 1787 return true; 1788 } 1789 1790 // Align the pointer arguments to this call if the target thinks it's a good 1791 // idea 1792 unsigned MinSize, PrefAlign; 1793 if (TLI && TLI->shouldAlignPointerArgs(CI, MinSize, PrefAlign)) { 1794 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) { 1795 // We want to align both objects whose address is used directly and 1796 // objects whose address is used in casts and GEPs, though it only makes 1797 // sense for GEPs if the offset is a multiple of the desired alignment and 1798 // if size - offset meets the size threshold. 1799 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy()) 1800 continue; 1801 APInt Offset(DL->getIndexSizeInBits( 1802 cast<PointerType>(Arg->getType())->getAddressSpace()), 1803 0); 1804 Value *Val = Arg->stripAndAccumulateInBoundsConstantOffsets(*DL, Offset); 1805 uint64_t Offset2 = Offset.getLimitedValue(); 1806 if ((Offset2 & (PrefAlign-1)) != 0) 1807 continue; 1808 AllocaInst *AI; 1809 if ((AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) && AI->getAlignment() < PrefAlign && 1810 DL->getTypeAllocSize(AI->getAllocatedType()) >= MinSize + Offset2) 1811 AI->setAlignment(PrefAlign); 1812 // Global variables can only be aligned if they are defined in this 1813 // object (i.e. they are uniquely initialized in this object), and 1814 // over-aligning global variables that have an explicit section is 1815 // forbidden. 1816 GlobalVariable *GV; 1817 if ((GV = dyn_cast<GlobalVariable>(Val)) && GV->canIncreaseAlignment() && 1818 GV->getPointerAlignment(*DL) < PrefAlign && 1819 DL->getTypeAllocSize(GV->getValueType()) >= 1820 MinSize + Offset2) 1821 GV->setAlignment(PrefAlign); 1822 } 1823 // If this is a memcpy (or similar) then we may be able to improve the 1824 // alignment 1825 if (MemIntrinsic *MI = dyn_cast<MemIntrinsic>(CI)) { 1826 unsigned DestAlign = getKnownAlignment(MI->getDest(), *DL); 1827 if (DestAlign > MI->getDestAlignment()) 1828 MI->setDestAlignment(DestAlign); 1829 if (MemTransferInst *MTI = dyn_cast<MemTransferInst>(MI)) { 1830 unsigned SrcAlign = getKnownAlignment(MTI->getSource(), *DL); 1831 if (SrcAlign > MTI->getSourceAlignment()) 1832 MTI->setSourceAlignment(SrcAlign); 1833 } 1834 } 1835 } 1836 1837 // If we have a cold call site, try to sink addressing computation into the 1838 // cold block. This interacts with our handling for loads and stores to 1839 // ensure that we can fold all uses of a potential addressing computation 1840 // into their uses. TODO: generalize this to work over profiling data 1841 if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold)) 1842 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) { 1843 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy()) 1844 continue; 1845 unsigned AS = Arg->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 1846 return optimizeMemoryInst(CI, Arg, Arg->getType(), AS); 1847 } 1848 1849 IntrinsicInst *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(CI); 1850 if (II) { 1851 switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) { 1852 default: break; 1853 case Intrinsic::experimental_widenable_condition: { 1854 // Give up on future widening oppurtunties so that we can fold away dead 1855 // paths and merge blocks before going into block-local instruction 1856 // selection. 1857 if (II->use_empty()) { 1858 II->eraseFromParent(); 1859 return true; 1860 } 1861 Constant *RetVal = ConstantInt::getTrue(II->getContext()); 1862 resetIteratorIfInvalidatedWhileCalling(BB, [&]() { 1863 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal, TLInfo, nullptr); 1864 }); 1865 return true; 1866 } 1867 case Intrinsic::objectsize: { 1868 // Lower all uses of llvm.objectsize.* 1869 Value *RetVal = 1870 lowerObjectSizeCall(II, *DL, TLInfo, /*MustSucceed=*/true); 1871 1872 resetIteratorIfInvalidatedWhileCalling(BB, [&]() { 1873 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal, TLInfo, nullptr); 1874 }); 1875 return true; 1876 } 1877 case Intrinsic::is_constant: { 1878 // If is_constant hasn't folded away yet, lower it to false now. 1879 Constant *RetVal = ConstantInt::get(II->getType(), 0); 1880 resetIteratorIfInvalidatedWhileCalling(BB, [&]() { 1881 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal, TLInfo, nullptr); 1882 }); 1883 return true; 1884 } 1885 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stlxr: 1886 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stxr: { 1887 ZExtInst *ExtVal = dyn_cast<ZExtInst>(CI->getArgOperand(0)); 1888 if (!ExtVal || !ExtVal->hasOneUse() || 1889 ExtVal->getParent() == CI->getParent()) 1890 return false; 1891 // Sink a zext feeding stlxr/stxr before it, so it can be folded into it. 1892 ExtVal->moveBefore(CI); 1893 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other 1894 // optimizations don't touch it. 1895 InsertedInsts.insert(ExtVal); 1896 return true; 1897 } 1898 1899 case Intrinsic::launder_invariant_group: 1900 case Intrinsic::strip_invariant_group: { 1901 Value *ArgVal = II->getArgOperand(0); 1902 auto it = LargeOffsetGEPMap.find(II); 1903 if (it != LargeOffsetGEPMap.end()) { 1904 // Merge entries in LargeOffsetGEPMap to reflect the RAUW. 1905 // Make sure not to have to deal with iterator invalidation 1906 // after possibly adding ArgVal to LargeOffsetGEPMap. 1907 auto GEPs = std::move(it->second); 1908 LargeOffsetGEPMap[ArgVal].append(GEPs.begin(), GEPs.end()); 1909 LargeOffsetGEPMap.erase(II); 1910 } 1911 1912 II->replaceAllUsesWith(ArgVal); 1913 II->eraseFromParent(); 1914 return true; 1915 } 1916 case Intrinsic::cttz: 1917 case Intrinsic::ctlz: 1918 // If counting zeros is expensive, try to avoid it. 1919 return despeculateCountZeros(II, TLI, DL, ModifiedDT); 1920 } 1921 1922 if (TLI) { 1923 SmallVector<Value*, 2> PtrOps; 1924 Type *AccessTy; 1925 if (TLI->getAddrModeArguments(II, PtrOps, AccessTy)) 1926 while (!PtrOps.empty()) { 1927 Value *PtrVal = PtrOps.pop_back_val(); 1928 unsigned AS = PtrVal->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 1929 if (optimizeMemoryInst(II, PtrVal, AccessTy, AS)) 1930 return true; 1931 } 1932 } 1933 } 1934 1935 // From here on out we're working with named functions. 1936 if (!CI->getCalledFunction()) return false; 1937 1938 // Lower all default uses of _chk calls. This is very similar 1939 // to what InstCombineCalls does, but here we are only lowering calls 1940 // to fortified library functions (e.g. __memcpy_chk) that have the default 1941 // "don't know" as the objectsize. Anything else should be left alone. 1942 FortifiedLibCallSimplifier Simplifier(TLInfo, true); 1943 if (Value *V = Simplifier.optimizeCall(CI)) { 1944 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(V); 1945 CI->eraseFromParent(); 1946 return true; 1947 } 1948 1949 return false; 1950 } 1951 1952 /// Look for opportunities to duplicate return instructions to the predecessor 1953 /// to enable tail call optimizations. The case it is currently looking for is: 1954 /// @code 1955 /// bb0: 1956 /// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0() 1957 /// br label %return 1958 /// bb1: 1959 /// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1() 1960 /// br label %return 1961 /// bb2: 1962 /// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2() 1963 /// br label %return 1964 /// return: 1965 /// %retval = phi i32 [ %tmp0, %bb0 ], [ %tmp1, %bb1 ], [ %tmp2, %bb2 ] 1966 /// ret i32 %retval 1967 /// @endcode 1968 /// 1969 /// => 1970 /// 1971 /// @code 1972 /// bb0: 1973 /// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0() 1974 /// ret i32 %tmp0 1975 /// bb1: 1976 /// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1() 1977 /// ret i32 %tmp1 1978 /// bb2: 1979 /// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2() 1980 /// ret i32 %tmp2 1981 /// @endcode 1982 bool CodeGenPrepare::dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB, bool &ModifiedDT) { 1983 if (!TLI) 1984 return false; 1985 1986 ReturnInst *RetI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator()); 1987 if (!RetI) 1988 return false; 1989 1990 PHINode *PN = nullptr; 1991 BitCastInst *BCI = nullptr; 1992 Value *V = RetI->getReturnValue(); 1993 if (V) { 1994 BCI = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(V); 1995 if (BCI) 1996 V = BCI->getOperand(0); 1997 1998 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V); 1999 if (!PN) 2000 return false; 2001 } 2002 2003 if (PN && PN->getParent() != BB) 2004 return false; 2005 2006 // Make sure there are no instructions between the PHI and return, or that the 2007 // return is the first instruction in the block. 2008 if (PN) { 2009 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin(); 2010 // Skip over debug and the bitcast. 2011 do { ++BI; } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI) || &*BI == BCI); 2012 if (&*BI != RetI) 2013 return false; 2014 } else { 2015 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin(); 2016 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI)) ++BI; 2017 if (&*BI != RetI) 2018 return false; 2019 } 2020 2021 /// Only dup the ReturnInst if the CallInst is likely to be emitted as a tail 2022 /// call. 2023 const Function *F = BB->getParent(); 2024 SmallVector<CallInst*, 4> TailCalls; 2025 if (PN) { 2026 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) { 2027 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(PN->getIncomingValue(I)); 2028 // Make sure the phi value is indeed produced by the tail call. 2029 if (CI && CI->hasOneUse() && CI->getParent() == PN->getIncomingBlock(I) && 2030 TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) && 2031 attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI)) 2032 TailCalls.push_back(CI); 2033 } 2034 } else { 2035 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 4> VisitedBBs; 2036 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE; ++PI) { 2037 if (!VisitedBBs.insert(*PI).second) 2038 continue; 2039 2040 BasicBlock::InstListType &InstList = (*PI)->getInstList(); 2041 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI = InstList.rbegin(); 2042 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RE = InstList.rend(); 2043 do { ++RI; } while (RI != RE && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI)); 2044 if (RI == RE) 2045 continue; 2046 2047 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&*RI); 2048 if (CI && CI->use_empty() && TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) && 2049 attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI)) 2050 TailCalls.push_back(CI); 2051 } 2052 } 2053 2054 bool Changed = false; 2055 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TailCalls.size(); i != e; ++i) { 2056 CallInst *CI = TailCalls[i]; 2057 CallSite CS(CI); 2058 2059 // Make sure the call instruction is followed by an unconditional branch to 2060 // the return block. 2061 BasicBlock *CallBB = CI->getParent(); 2062 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(CallBB->getTerminator()); 2063 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB) 2064 continue; 2065 2066 // Duplicate the return into CallBB. 2067 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RetI, BB, CallBB); 2068 ModifiedDT = Changed = true; 2069 ++NumRetsDup; 2070 } 2071 2072 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now. 2073 if (Changed && !BB->hasAddressTaken() && pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB)) 2074 BB->eraseFromParent(); 2075 2076 return Changed; 2077 } 2078 2079 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 2080 // Memory Optimization 2081 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 2082 2083 namespace { 2084 2085 /// This is an extended version of TargetLowering::AddrMode 2086 /// which holds actual Value*'s for register values. 2087 struct ExtAddrMode : public TargetLowering::AddrMode { 2088 Value *BaseReg = nullptr; 2089 Value *ScaledReg = nullptr; 2090 Value *OriginalValue = nullptr; 2091 bool InBounds = true; 2092 2093 enum FieldName { 2094 NoField = 0x00, 2095 BaseRegField = 0x01, 2096 BaseGVField = 0x02, 2097 BaseOffsField = 0x04, 2098 ScaledRegField = 0x08, 2099 ScaleField = 0x10, 2100 MultipleFields = 0xff 2101 }; 2102 2103 2104 ExtAddrMode() = default; 2105 2106 void print(raw_ostream &OS) const; 2107 void dump() const; 2108 2109 FieldName compare(const ExtAddrMode &other) { 2110 // First check that the types are the same on each field, as differing types 2111 // is something we can't cope with later on. 2112 if (BaseReg && other.BaseReg && 2113 BaseReg->getType() != other.BaseReg->getType()) 2114 return MultipleFields; 2115 if (BaseGV && other.BaseGV && 2116 BaseGV->getType() != other.BaseGV->getType()) 2117 return MultipleFields; 2118 if (ScaledReg && other.ScaledReg && 2119 ScaledReg->getType() != other.ScaledReg->getType()) 2120 return MultipleFields; 2121 2122 // Conservatively reject 'inbounds' mismatches. 2123 if (InBounds != other.InBounds) 2124 return MultipleFields; 2125 2126 // Check each field to see if it differs. 2127 unsigned Result = NoField; 2128 if (BaseReg != other.BaseReg) 2129 Result |= BaseRegField; 2130 if (BaseGV != other.BaseGV) 2131 Result |= BaseGVField; 2132 if (BaseOffs != other.BaseOffs) 2133 Result |= BaseOffsField; 2134 if (ScaledReg != other.ScaledReg) 2135 Result |= ScaledRegField; 2136 // Don't count 0 as being a different scale, because that actually means 2137 // unscaled (which will already be counted by having no ScaledReg). 2138 if (Scale && other.Scale && Scale != other.Scale) 2139 Result |= ScaleField; 2140 2141 if (countPopulation(Result) > 1) 2142 return MultipleFields; 2143 else 2144 return static_cast<FieldName>(Result); 2145 } 2146 2147 // An AddrMode is trivial if it involves no calculation i.e. it is just a base 2148 // with no offset. 2149 bool isTrivial() { 2150 // An AddrMode is (BaseGV + BaseReg + BaseOffs + ScaleReg * Scale) so it is 2151 // trivial if at most one of these terms is nonzero, except that BaseGV and 2152 // BaseReg both being zero actually means a null pointer value, which we 2153 // consider to be 'non-zero' here. 2154 return !BaseOffs && !Scale && !(BaseGV && BaseReg); 2155 } 2156 2157 Value *GetFieldAsValue(FieldName Field, Type *IntPtrTy) { 2158 switch (Field) { 2159 default: 2160 return nullptr; 2161 case BaseRegField: 2162 return BaseReg; 2163 case BaseGVField: 2164 return BaseGV; 2165 case ScaledRegField: 2166 return ScaledReg; 2167 case BaseOffsField: 2168 return ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, BaseOffs); 2169 } 2170 } 2171 2172 void SetCombinedField(FieldName Field, Value *V, 2173 const SmallVectorImpl<ExtAddrMode> &AddrModes) { 2174 switch (Field) { 2175 default: 2176 llvm_unreachable("Unhandled fields are expected to be rejected earlier"); 2177 break; 2178 case ExtAddrMode::BaseRegField: 2179 BaseReg = V; 2180 break; 2181 case ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField: 2182 // A combined BaseGV is an Instruction, not a GlobalValue, so it goes 2183 // in the BaseReg field. 2184 assert(BaseReg == nullptr); 2185 BaseReg = V; 2186 BaseGV = nullptr; 2187 break; 2188 case ExtAddrMode::ScaledRegField: 2189 ScaledReg = V; 2190 // If we have a mix of scaled and unscaled addrmodes then we want scale 2191 // to be the scale and not zero. 2192 if (!Scale) 2193 for (const ExtAddrMode &AM : AddrModes) 2194 if (AM.Scale) { 2195 Scale = AM.Scale; 2196 break; 2197 } 2198 break; 2199 case ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField: 2200 // The offset is no longer a constant, so it goes in ScaledReg with a 2201 // scale of 1. 2202 assert(ScaledReg == nullptr); 2203 ScaledReg = V; 2204 Scale = 1; 2205 BaseOffs = 0; 2206 break; 2207 } 2208 } 2209 }; 2210 2211 } // end anonymous namespace 2212 2213 #ifndef NDEBUG 2214 static inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const ExtAddrMode &AM) { 2215 AM.print(OS); 2216 return OS; 2217 } 2218 #endif 2219 2220 #if !defined(NDEBUG) || defined(LLVM_ENABLE_DUMP) 2221 void ExtAddrMode::print(raw_ostream &OS) const { 2222 bool NeedPlus = false; 2223 OS << "["; 2224 if (InBounds) 2225 OS << "inbounds "; 2226 if (BaseGV) { 2227 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2228 << "GV:"; 2229 BaseGV->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false); 2230 NeedPlus = true; 2231 } 2232 2233 if (BaseOffs) { 2234 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2235 << BaseOffs; 2236 NeedPlus = true; 2237 } 2238 2239 if (BaseReg) { 2240 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2241 << "Base:"; 2242 BaseReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false); 2243 NeedPlus = true; 2244 } 2245 if (Scale) { 2246 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2247 << Scale << "*"; 2248 ScaledReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false); 2249 } 2250 2251 OS << ']'; 2252 } 2253 2254 LLVM_DUMP_METHOD void ExtAddrMode::dump() const { 2255 print(dbgs()); 2256 dbgs() << '\n'; 2257 } 2258 #endif 2259 2260 namespace { 2261 2262 /// This class provides transaction based operation on the IR. 2263 /// Every change made through this class is recorded in the internal state and 2264 /// can be undone (rollback) until commit is called. 2265 class TypePromotionTransaction { 2266 /// This represents the common interface of the individual transaction. 2267 /// Each class implements the logic for doing one specific modification on 2268 /// the IR via the TypePromotionTransaction. 2269 class TypePromotionAction { 2270 protected: 2271 /// The Instruction modified. 2272 Instruction *Inst; 2273 2274 public: 2275 /// Constructor of the action. 2276 /// The constructor performs the related action on the IR. 2277 TypePromotionAction(Instruction *Inst) : Inst(Inst) {} 2278 2279 virtual ~TypePromotionAction() = default; 2280 2281 /// Undo the modification done by this action. 2282 /// When this method is called, the IR must be in the same state as it was 2283 /// before this action was applied. 2284 /// \pre Undoing the action works if and only if the IR is in the exact same 2285 /// state as it was directly after this action was applied. 2286 virtual void undo() = 0; 2287 2288 /// Advocate every change made by this action. 2289 /// When the results on the IR of the action are to be kept, it is important 2290 /// to call this function, otherwise hidden information may be kept forever. 2291 virtual void commit() { 2292 // Nothing to be done, this action is not doing anything. 2293 } 2294 }; 2295 2296 /// Utility to remember the position of an instruction. 2297 class InsertionHandler { 2298 /// Position of an instruction. 2299 /// Either an instruction: 2300 /// - Is the first in a basic block: BB is used. 2301 /// - Has a previous instruction: PrevInst is used. 2302 union { 2303 Instruction *PrevInst; 2304 BasicBlock *BB; 2305 } Point; 2306 2307 /// Remember whether or not the instruction had a previous instruction. 2308 bool HasPrevInstruction; 2309 2310 public: 2311 /// Record the position of \p Inst. 2312 InsertionHandler(Instruction *Inst) { 2313 BasicBlock::iterator It = Inst->getIterator(); 2314 HasPrevInstruction = (It != (Inst->getParent()->begin())); 2315 if (HasPrevInstruction) 2316 Point.PrevInst = &*--It; 2317 else 2318 Point.BB = Inst->getParent(); 2319 } 2320 2321 /// Insert \p Inst at the recorded position. 2322 void insert(Instruction *Inst) { 2323 if (HasPrevInstruction) { 2324 if (Inst->getParent()) 2325 Inst->removeFromParent(); 2326 Inst->insertAfter(Point.PrevInst); 2327 } else { 2328 Instruction *Position = &*Point.BB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 2329 if (Inst->getParent()) 2330 Inst->moveBefore(Position); 2331 else 2332 Inst->insertBefore(Position); 2333 } 2334 } 2335 }; 2336 2337 /// Move an instruction before another. 2338 class InstructionMoveBefore : public TypePromotionAction { 2339 /// Original position of the instruction. 2340 InsertionHandler Position; 2341 2342 public: 2343 /// Move \p Inst before \p Before. 2344 InstructionMoveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before) 2345 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Position(Inst) { 2346 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: move: " << *Inst << "\nbefore: " << *Before 2347 << "\n"); 2348 Inst->moveBefore(Before); 2349 } 2350 2351 /// Move the instruction back to its original position. 2352 void undo() override { 2353 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: moveBefore: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2354 Position.insert(Inst); 2355 } 2356 }; 2357 2358 /// Set the operand of an instruction with a new value. 2359 class OperandSetter : public TypePromotionAction { 2360 /// Original operand of the instruction. 2361 Value *Origin; 2362 2363 /// Index of the modified instruction. 2364 unsigned Idx; 2365 2366 public: 2367 /// Set \p Idx operand of \p Inst with \p NewVal. 2368 OperandSetter(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal) 2369 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Idx(Idx) { 2370 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: setOperand: " << Idx << "\n" 2371 << "for:" << *Inst << "\n" 2372 << "with:" << *NewVal << "\n"); 2373 Origin = Inst->getOperand(Idx); 2374 Inst->setOperand(Idx, NewVal); 2375 } 2376 2377 /// Restore the original value of the instruction. 2378 void undo() override { 2379 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: setOperand:" << Idx << "\n" 2380 << "for: " << *Inst << "\n" 2381 << "with: " << *Origin << "\n"); 2382 Inst->setOperand(Idx, Origin); 2383 } 2384 }; 2385 2386 /// Hide the operands of an instruction. 2387 /// Do as if this instruction was not using any of its operands. 2388 class OperandsHider : public TypePromotionAction { 2389 /// The list of original operands. 2390 SmallVector<Value *, 4> OriginalValues; 2391 2392 public: 2393 /// Remove \p Inst from the uses of the operands of \p Inst. 2394 OperandsHider(Instruction *Inst) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) { 2395 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2396 unsigned NumOpnds = Inst->getNumOperands(); 2397 OriginalValues.reserve(NumOpnds); 2398 for (unsigned It = 0; It < NumOpnds; ++It) { 2399 // Save the current operand. 2400 Value *Val = Inst->getOperand(It); 2401 OriginalValues.push_back(Val); 2402 // Set a dummy one. 2403 // We could use OperandSetter here, but that would imply an overhead 2404 // that we are not willing to pay. 2405 Inst->setOperand(It, UndefValue::get(Val->getType())); 2406 } 2407 } 2408 2409 /// Restore the original list of uses. 2410 void undo() override { 2411 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2412 for (unsigned It = 0, EndIt = OriginalValues.size(); It != EndIt; ++It) 2413 Inst->setOperand(It, OriginalValues[It]); 2414 } 2415 }; 2416 2417 /// Build a truncate instruction. 2418 class TruncBuilder : public TypePromotionAction { 2419 Value *Val; 2420 2421 public: 2422 /// Build a truncate instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty 2423 /// result. 2424 /// trunc Opnd to Ty. 2425 TruncBuilder(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty) : TypePromotionAction(Opnd) { 2426 IRBuilder<> Builder(Opnd); 2427 Val = Builder.CreateTrunc(Opnd, Ty, "promoted"); 2428 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2429 } 2430 2431 /// Get the built value. 2432 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; } 2433 2434 /// Remove the built instruction. 2435 void undo() override { 2436 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2437 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val)) 2438 IVal->eraseFromParent(); 2439 } 2440 }; 2441 2442 /// Build a sign extension instruction. 2443 class SExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction { 2444 Value *Val; 2445 2446 public: 2447 /// Build a sign extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty 2448 /// result. 2449 /// sext Opnd to Ty. 2450 SExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) 2451 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) { 2452 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt); 2453 Val = Builder.CreateSExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted"); 2454 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2455 } 2456 2457 /// Get the built value. 2458 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; } 2459 2460 /// Remove the built instruction. 2461 void undo() override { 2462 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2463 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val)) 2464 IVal->eraseFromParent(); 2465 } 2466 }; 2467 2468 /// Build a zero extension instruction. 2469 class ZExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction { 2470 Value *Val; 2471 2472 public: 2473 /// Build a zero extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty 2474 /// result. 2475 /// zext Opnd to Ty. 2476 ZExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) 2477 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) { 2478 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt); 2479 Val = Builder.CreateZExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted"); 2480 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2481 } 2482 2483 /// Get the built value. 2484 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; } 2485 2486 /// Remove the built instruction. 2487 void undo() override { 2488 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2489 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val)) 2490 IVal->eraseFromParent(); 2491 } 2492 }; 2493 2494 /// Mutate an instruction to another type. 2495 class TypeMutator : public TypePromotionAction { 2496 /// Record the original type. 2497 Type *OrigTy; 2498 2499 public: 2500 /// Mutate the type of \p Inst into \p NewTy. 2501 TypeMutator(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) 2502 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), OrigTy(Inst->getType()) { 2503 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *NewTy 2504 << "\n"); 2505 Inst->mutateType(NewTy); 2506 } 2507 2508 /// Mutate the instruction back to its original type. 2509 void undo() override { 2510 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *OrigTy 2511 << "\n"); 2512 Inst->mutateType(OrigTy); 2513 } 2514 }; 2515 2516 /// Replace the uses of an instruction by another instruction. 2517 class UsesReplacer : public TypePromotionAction { 2518 /// Helper structure to keep track of the replaced uses. 2519 struct InstructionAndIdx { 2520 /// The instruction using the instruction. 2521 Instruction *Inst; 2522 2523 /// The index where this instruction is used for Inst. 2524 unsigned Idx; 2525 2526 InstructionAndIdx(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx) 2527 : Inst(Inst), Idx(Idx) {} 2528 }; 2529 2530 /// Keep track of the original uses (pair Instruction, Index). 2531 SmallVector<InstructionAndIdx, 4> OriginalUses; 2532 /// Keep track of the debug users. 2533 SmallVector<DbgValueInst *, 1> DbgValues; 2534 2535 using use_iterator = SmallVectorImpl<InstructionAndIdx>::iterator; 2536 2537 public: 2538 /// Replace all the use of \p Inst by \p New. 2539 UsesReplacer(Instruction *Inst, Value *New) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) { 2540 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << " with " << *New 2541 << "\n"); 2542 // Record the original uses. 2543 for (Use &U : Inst->uses()) { 2544 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser()); 2545 OriginalUses.push_back(InstructionAndIdx(UserI, U.getOperandNo())); 2546 } 2547 // Record the debug uses separately. They are not in the instruction's 2548 // use list, but they are replaced by RAUW. 2549 findDbgValues(DbgValues, Inst); 2550 2551 // Now, we can replace the uses. 2552 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(New); 2553 } 2554 2555 /// Reassign the original uses of Inst to Inst. 2556 void undo() override { 2557 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2558 for (use_iterator UseIt = OriginalUses.begin(), 2559 EndIt = OriginalUses.end(); 2560 UseIt != EndIt; ++UseIt) { 2561 UseIt->Inst->setOperand(UseIt->Idx, Inst); 2562 } 2563 // RAUW has replaced all original uses with references to the new value, 2564 // including the debug uses. Since we are undoing the replacements, 2565 // the original debug uses must also be reinstated to maintain the 2566 // correctness and utility of debug value instructions. 2567 for (auto *DVI: DbgValues) { 2568 LLVMContext &Ctx = Inst->getType()->getContext(); 2569 auto *MV = MetadataAsValue::get(Ctx, ValueAsMetadata::get(Inst)); 2570 DVI->setOperand(0, MV); 2571 } 2572 } 2573 }; 2574 2575 /// Remove an instruction from the IR. 2576 class InstructionRemover : public TypePromotionAction { 2577 /// Original position of the instruction. 2578 InsertionHandler Inserter; 2579 2580 /// Helper structure to hide all the link to the instruction. In other 2581 /// words, this helps to do as if the instruction was removed. 2582 OperandsHider Hider; 2583 2584 /// Keep track of the uses replaced, if any. 2585 UsesReplacer *Replacer = nullptr; 2586 2587 /// Keep track of instructions removed. 2588 SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts; 2589 2590 public: 2591 /// Remove all reference of \p Inst and optionally replace all its 2592 /// uses with New. 2593 /// \p RemovedInsts Keep track of the instructions removed by this Action. 2594 /// \pre If !Inst->use_empty(), then New != nullptr 2595 InstructionRemover(Instruction *Inst, SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts, 2596 Value *New = nullptr) 2597 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Inserter(Inst), Hider(Inst), 2598 RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) { 2599 if (New) 2600 Replacer = new UsesReplacer(Inst, New); 2601 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2602 RemovedInsts.insert(Inst); 2603 /// The instructions removed here will be freed after completing 2604 /// optimizeBlock() for all blocks as we need to keep track of the 2605 /// removed instructions during promotion. 2606 Inst->removeFromParent(); 2607 } 2608 2609 ~InstructionRemover() override { delete Replacer; } 2610 2611 /// Resurrect the instruction and reassign it to the proper uses if 2612 /// new value was provided when build this action. 2613 void undo() override { 2614 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2615 Inserter.insert(Inst); 2616 if (Replacer) 2617 Replacer->undo(); 2618 Hider.undo(); 2619 RemovedInsts.erase(Inst); 2620 } 2621 }; 2622 2623 public: 2624 /// Restoration point. 2625 /// The restoration point is a pointer to an action instead of an iterator 2626 /// because the iterator may be invalidated but not the pointer. 2627 using ConstRestorationPt = const TypePromotionAction *; 2628 2629 TypePromotionTransaction(SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts) 2630 : RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) {} 2631 2632 /// Advocate every changes made in that transaction. 2633 void commit(); 2634 2635 /// Undo all the changes made after the given point. 2636 void rollback(ConstRestorationPt Point); 2637 2638 /// Get the current restoration point. 2639 ConstRestorationPt getRestorationPoint() const; 2640 2641 /// \name API for IR modification with state keeping to support rollback. 2642 /// @{ 2643 /// Same as Instruction::setOperand. 2644 void setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal); 2645 2646 /// Same as Instruction::eraseFromParent. 2647 void eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, Value *NewVal = nullptr); 2648 2649 /// Same as Value::replaceAllUsesWith. 2650 void replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, Value *New); 2651 2652 /// Same as Value::mutateType. 2653 void mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy); 2654 2655 /// Same as IRBuilder::createTrunc. 2656 Value *createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty); 2657 2658 /// Same as IRBuilder::createSExt. 2659 Value *createSExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty); 2660 2661 /// Same as IRBuilder::createZExt. 2662 Value *createZExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty); 2663 2664 /// Same as Instruction::moveBefore. 2665 void moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before); 2666 /// @} 2667 2668 private: 2669 /// The ordered list of actions made so far. 2670 SmallVector<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>, 16> Actions; 2671 2672 using CommitPt = SmallVectorImpl<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>>::iterator; 2673 2674 SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts; 2675 }; 2676 2677 } // end anonymous namespace 2678 2679 void TypePromotionTransaction::setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, 2680 Value *NewVal) { 2681 Actions.push_back(llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::OperandSetter>( 2682 Inst, Idx, NewVal)); 2683 } 2684 2685 void TypePromotionTransaction::eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, 2686 Value *NewVal) { 2687 Actions.push_back( 2688 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionRemover>( 2689 Inst, RemovedInsts, NewVal)); 2690 } 2691 2692 void TypePromotionTransaction::replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, 2693 Value *New) { 2694 Actions.push_back( 2695 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::UsesReplacer>(Inst, New)); 2696 } 2697 2698 void TypePromotionTransaction::mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) { 2699 Actions.push_back( 2700 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::TypeMutator>(Inst, NewTy)); 2701 } 2702 2703 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, 2704 Type *Ty) { 2705 std::unique_ptr<TruncBuilder> Ptr(new TruncBuilder(Opnd, Ty)); 2706 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue(); 2707 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr)); 2708 return Val; 2709 } 2710 2711 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createSExt(Instruction *Inst, 2712 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) { 2713 std::unique_ptr<SExtBuilder> Ptr(new SExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty)); 2714 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue(); 2715 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr)); 2716 return Val; 2717 } 2718 2719 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createZExt(Instruction *Inst, 2720 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) { 2721 std::unique_ptr<ZExtBuilder> Ptr(new ZExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty)); 2722 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue(); 2723 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr)); 2724 return Val; 2725 } 2726 2727 void TypePromotionTransaction::moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, 2728 Instruction *Before) { 2729 Actions.push_back( 2730 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionMoveBefore>( 2731 Inst, Before)); 2732 } 2733 2734 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt 2735 TypePromotionTransaction::getRestorationPoint() const { 2736 return !Actions.empty() ? Actions.back().get() : nullptr; 2737 } 2738 2739 void TypePromotionTransaction::commit() { 2740 for (CommitPt It = Actions.begin(), EndIt = Actions.end(); It != EndIt; 2741 ++It) 2742 (*It)->commit(); 2743 Actions.clear(); 2744 } 2745 2746 void TypePromotionTransaction::rollback( 2747 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt Point) { 2748 while (!Actions.empty() && Point != Actions.back().get()) { 2749 std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction> Curr = Actions.pop_back_val(); 2750 Curr->undo(); 2751 } 2752 } 2753 2754 namespace { 2755 2756 /// A helper class for matching addressing modes. 2757 /// 2758 /// This encapsulates the logic for matching the target-legal addressing modes. 2759 class AddressingModeMatcher { 2760 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts; 2761 const TargetLowering &TLI; 2762 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI; 2763 const DataLayout &DL; 2764 2765 /// AccessTy/MemoryInst - This is the type for the access (e.g. double) and 2766 /// the memory instruction that we're computing this address for. 2767 Type *AccessTy; 2768 unsigned AddrSpace; 2769 Instruction *MemoryInst; 2770 2771 /// This is the addressing mode that we're building up. This is 2772 /// part of the return value of this addressing mode matching stuff. 2773 ExtAddrMode &AddrMode; 2774 2775 /// The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare optimizations. 2776 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts; 2777 2778 /// A map from the instructions to their type before promotion. 2779 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts; 2780 2781 /// The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered. 2782 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT; 2783 2784 // A GEP which has too large offset to be folded into the addressing mode. 2785 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP; 2786 2787 /// This is set to true when we should not do profitability checks. 2788 /// When true, IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode always returns true. 2789 bool IgnoreProfitability; 2790 2791 AddressingModeMatcher( 2792 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AMI, const TargetLowering &TLI, 2793 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, Type *AT, unsigned AS, Instruction *MI, 2794 ExtAddrMode &AM, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, 2795 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 2796 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP) 2797 : AddrModeInsts(AMI), TLI(TLI), TRI(TRI), 2798 DL(MI->getModule()->getDataLayout()), AccessTy(AT), AddrSpace(AS), 2799 MemoryInst(MI), AddrMode(AM), InsertedInsts(InsertedInsts), 2800 PromotedInsts(PromotedInsts), TPT(TPT), LargeOffsetGEP(LargeOffsetGEP) { 2801 IgnoreProfitability = false; 2802 } 2803 2804 public: 2805 /// Find the maximal addressing mode that a load/store of V can fold, 2806 /// give an access type of AccessTy. This returns a list of involved 2807 /// instructions in AddrModeInsts. 2808 /// \p InsertedInsts The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare 2809 /// optimizations. 2810 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 2811 /// \p The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered. 2812 static ExtAddrMode 2813 Match(Value *V, Type *AccessTy, unsigned AS, Instruction *MemoryInst, 2814 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AddrModeInsts, 2815 const TargetLowering &TLI, const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, 2816 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 2817 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 2818 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP) { 2819 ExtAddrMode Result; 2820 2821 bool Success = AddressingModeMatcher(AddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI, AccessTy, AS, 2822 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedInsts, 2823 PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP) 2824 .matchAddr(V, 0); 2825 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?"); 2826 return Result; 2827 } 2828 2829 private: 2830 bool matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, unsigned Depth); 2831 bool matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth); 2832 bool matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode, unsigned Depth, 2833 bool *MovedAway = nullptr); 2834 bool isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, 2835 ExtAddrMode &AMBefore, 2836 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter); 2837 bool valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val, Value *KnownLive1, Value *KnownLive2); 2838 bool isPromotionProfitable(unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, 2839 Value *PromotedOperand) const; 2840 }; 2841 2842 class PhiNodeSet; 2843 2844 /// An iterator for PhiNodeSet. 2845 class PhiNodeSetIterator { 2846 PhiNodeSet * const Set; 2847 size_t CurrentIndex = 0; 2848 2849 public: 2850 /// The constructor. Start should point to either a valid element, or be equal 2851 /// to the size of the underlying SmallVector of the PhiNodeSet. 2852 PhiNodeSetIterator(PhiNodeSet * const Set, size_t Start); 2853 PHINode * operator*() const; 2854 PhiNodeSetIterator& operator++(); 2855 bool operator==(const PhiNodeSetIterator &RHS) const; 2856 bool operator!=(const PhiNodeSetIterator &RHS) const; 2857 }; 2858 2859 /// Keeps a set of PHINodes. 2860 /// 2861 /// This is a minimal set implementation for a specific use case: 2862 /// It is very fast when there are very few elements, but also provides good 2863 /// performance when there are many. It is similar to SmallPtrSet, but also 2864 /// provides iteration by insertion order, which is deterministic and stable 2865 /// across runs. It is also similar to SmallSetVector, but provides removing 2866 /// elements in O(1) time. This is achieved by not actually removing the element 2867 /// from the underlying vector, so comes at the cost of using more memory, but 2868 /// that is fine, since PhiNodeSets are used as short lived objects. 2869 class PhiNodeSet { 2870 friend class PhiNodeSetIterator; 2871 2872 using MapType = SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, size_t, 32>; 2873 using iterator = PhiNodeSetIterator; 2874 2875 /// Keeps the elements in the order of their insertion in the underlying 2876 /// vector. To achieve constant time removal, it never deletes any element. 2877 SmallVector<PHINode *, 32> NodeList; 2878 2879 /// Keeps the elements in the underlying set implementation. This (and not the 2880 /// NodeList defined above) is the source of truth on whether an element 2881 /// is actually in the collection. 2882 MapType NodeMap; 2883 2884 /// Points to the first valid (not deleted) element when the set is not empty 2885 /// and the value is not zero. Equals to the size of the underlying vector 2886 /// when the set is empty. When the value is 0, as in the beginning, the 2887 /// first element may or may not be valid. 2888 size_t FirstValidElement = 0; 2889 2890 public: 2891 /// Inserts a new element to the collection. 2892 /// \returns true if the element is actually added, i.e. was not in the 2893 /// collection before the operation. 2894 bool insert(PHINode *Ptr) { 2895 if (NodeMap.insert(std::make_pair(Ptr, NodeList.size())).second) { 2896 NodeList.push_back(Ptr); 2897 return true; 2898 } 2899 return false; 2900 } 2901 2902 /// Removes the element from the collection. 2903 /// \returns whether the element is actually removed, i.e. was in the 2904 /// collection before the operation. 2905 bool erase(PHINode *Ptr) { 2906 auto it = NodeMap.find(Ptr); 2907 if (it != NodeMap.end()) { 2908 NodeMap.erase(Ptr); 2909 SkipRemovedElements(FirstValidElement); 2910 return true; 2911 } 2912 return false; 2913 } 2914 2915 /// Removes all elements and clears the collection. 2916 void clear() { 2917 NodeMap.clear(); 2918 NodeList.clear(); 2919 FirstValidElement = 0; 2920 } 2921 2922 /// \returns an iterator that will iterate the elements in the order of 2923 /// insertion. 2924 iterator begin() { 2925 if (FirstValidElement == 0) 2926 SkipRemovedElements(FirstValidElement); 2927 return PhiNodeSetIterator(this, FirstValidElement); 2928 } 2929 2930 /// \returns an iterator that points to the end of the collection. 2931 iterator end() { return PhiNodeSetIterator(this, NodeList.size()); } 2932 2933 /// Returns the number of elements in the collection. 2934 size_t size() const { 2935 return NodeMap.size(); 2936 } 2937 2938 /// \returns 1 if the given element is in the collection, and 0 if otherwise. 2939 size_t count(PHINode *Ptr) const { 2940 return NodeMap.count(Ptr); 2941 } 2942 2943 private: 2944 /// Updates the CurrentIndex so that it will point to a valid element. 2945 /// 2946 /// If the element of NodeList at CurrentIndex is valid, it does not 2947 /// change it. If there are no more valid elements, it updates CurrentIndex 2948 /// to point to the end of the NodeList. 2949 void SkipRemovedElements(size_t &CurrentIndex) { 2950 while (CurrentIndex < NodeList.size()) { 2951 auto it = NodeMap.find(NodeList[CurrentIndex]); 2952 // If the element has been deleted and added again later, NodeMap will 2953 // point to a different index, so CurrentIndex will still be invalid. 2954 if (it != NodeMap.end() && it->second == CurrentIndex) 2955 break; 2956 ++CurrentIndex; 2957 } 2958 } 2959 }; 2960 2961 PhiNodeSetIterator::PhiNodeSetIterator(PhiNodeSet *const Set, size_t Start) 2962 : Set(Set), CurrentIndex(Start) {} 2963 2964 PHINode * PhiNodeSetIterator::operator*() const { 2965 assert(CurrentIndex < Set->NodeList.size() && 2966 "PhiNodeSet access out of range"); 2967 return Set->NodeList[CurrentIndex]; 2968 } 2969 2970 PhiNodeSetIterator& PhiNodeSetIterator::operator++() { 2971 assert(CurrentIndex < Set->NodeList.size() && 2972 "PhiNodeSet access out of range"); 2973 ++CurrentIndex; 2974 Set->SkipRemovedElements(CurrentIndex); 2975 return *this; 2976 } 2977 2978 bool PhiNodeSetIterator::operator==(const PhiNodeSetIterator &RHS) const { 2979 return CurrentIndex == RHS.CurrentIndex; 2980 } 2981 2982 bool PhiNodeSetIterator::operator!=(const PhiNodeSetIterator &RHS) const { 2983 return !((*this) == RHS); 2984 } 2985 2986 /// Keep track of simplification of Phi nodes. 2987 /// Accept the set of all phi nodes and erase phi node from this set 2988 /// if it is simplified. 2989 class SimplificationTracker { 2990 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> Storage; 2991 const SimplifyQuery &SQ; 2992 // Tracks newly created Phi nodes. The elements are iterated by insertion 2993 // order. 2994 PhiNodeSet AllPhiNodes; 2995 // Tracks newly created Select nodes. 2996 SmallPtrSet<SelectInst *, 32> AllSelectNodes; 2997 2998 public: 2999 SimplificationTracker(const SimplifyQuery &sq) 3000 : SQ(sq) {} 3001 3002 Value *Get(Value *V) { 3003 do { 3004 auto SV = Storage.find(V); 3005 if (SV == Storage.end()) 3006 return V; 3007 V = SV->second; 3008 } while (true); 3009 } 3010 3011 Value *Simplify(Value *Val) { 3012 SmallVector<Value *, 32> WorkList; 3013 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 32> Visited; 3014 WorkList.push_back(Val); 3015 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 3016 auto P = WorkList.pop_back_val(); 3017 if (!Visited.insert(P).second) 3018 continue; 3019 if (auto *PI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(P)) 3020 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(cast<Instruction>(PI), SQ)) { 3021 for (auto *U : PI->users()) 3022 WorkList.push_back(cast<Value>(U)); 3023 Put(PI, V); 3024 PI->replaceAllUsesWith(V); 3025 if (auto *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(PI)) 3026 AllPhiNodes.erase(PHI); 3027 if (auto *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(PI)) 3028 AllSelectNodes.erase(Select); 3029 PI->eraseFromParent(); 3030 } 3031 } 3032 return Get(Val); 3033 } 3034 3035 void Put(Value *From, Value *To) { 3036 Storage.insert({ From, To }); 3037 } 3038 3039 void ReplacePhi(PHINode *From, PHINode *To) { 3040 Value* OldReplacement = Get(From); 3041 while (OldReplacement != From) { 3042 From = To; 3043 To = dyn_cast<PHINode>(OldReplacement); 3044 OldReplacement = Get(From); 3045 } 3046 assert(Get(To) == To && "Replacement PHI node is already replaced."); 3047 Put(From, To); 3048 From->replaceAllUsesWith(To); 3049 AllPhiNodes.erase(From); 3050 From->eraseFromParent(); 3051 } 3052 3053 PhiNodeSet& newPhiNodes() { return AllPhiNodes; } 3054 3055 void insertNewPhi(PHINode *PN) { AllPhiNodes.insert(PN); } 3056 3057 void insertNewSelect(SelectInst *SI) { AllSelectNodes.insert(SI); } 3058 3059 unsigned countNewPhiNodes() const { return AllPhiNodes.size(); } 3060 3061 unsigned countNewSelectNodes() const { return AllSelectNodes.size(); } 3062 3063 void destroyNewNodes(Type *CommonType) { 3064 // For safe erasing, replace the uses with dummy value first. 3065 auto Dummy = UndefValue::get(CommonType); 3066 for (auto I : AllPhiNodes) { 3067 I->replaceAllUsesWith(Dummy); 3068 I->eraseFromParent(); 3069 } 3070 AllPhiNodes.clear(); 3071 for (auto I : AllSelectNodes) { 3072 I->replaceAllUsesWith(Dummy); 3073 I->eraseFromParent(); 3074 } 3075 AllSelectNodes.clear(); 3076 } 3077 }; 3078 3079 /// A helper class for combining addressing modes. 3080 class AddressingModeCombiner { 3081 typedef DenseMap<Value *, Value *> FoldAddrToValueMapping; 3082 typedef std::pair<PHINode *, PHINode *> PHIPair; 3083 3084 private: 3085 /// The addressing modes we've collected. 3086 SmallVector<ExtAddrMode, 16> AddrModes; 3087 3088 /// The field in which the AddrModes differ, when we have more than one. 3089 ExtAddrMode::FieldName DifferentField = ExtAddrMode::NoField; 3090 3091 /// Are the AddrModes that we have all just equal to their original values? 3092 bool AllAddrModesTrivial = true; 3093 3094 /// Common Type for all different fields in addressing modes. 3095 Type *CommonType; 3096 3097 /// SimplifyQuery for simplifyInstruction utility. 3098 const SimplifyQuery &SQ; 3099 3100 /// Original Address. 3101 Value *Original; 3102 3103 public: 3104 AddressingModeCombiner(const SimplifyQuery &_SQ, Value *OriginalValue) 3105 : CommonType(nullptr), SQ(_SQ), Original(OriginalValue) {} 3106 3107 /// Get the combined AddrMode 3108 const ExtAddrMode &getAddrMode() const { 3109 return AddrModes[0]; 3110 } 3111 3112 /// Add a new AddrMode if it's compatible with the AddrModes we already 3113 /// have. 3114 /// \return True iff we succeeded in doing so. 3115 bool addNewAddrMode(ExtAddrMode &NewAddrMode) { 3116 // Take note of if we have any non-trivial AddrModes, as we need to detect 3117 // when all AddrModes are trivial as then we would introduce a phi or select 3118 // which just duplicates what's already there. 3119 AllAddrModesTrivial = AllAddrModesTrivial && NewAddrMode.isTrivial(); 3120 3121 // If this is the first addrmode then everything is fine. 3122 if (AddrModes.empty()) { 3123 AddrModes.emplace_back(NewAddrMode); 3124 return true; 3125 } 3126 3127 // Figure out how different this is from the other address modes, which we 3128 // can do just by comparing against the first one given that we only care 3129 // about the cumulative difference. 3130 ExtAddrMode::FieldName ThisDifferentField = 3131 AddrModes[0].compare(NewAddrMode); 3132 if (DifferentField == ExtAddrMode::NoField) 3133 DifferentField = ThisDifferentField; 3134 else if (DifferentField != ThisDifferentField) 3135 DifferentField = ExtAddrMode::MultipleFields; 3136 3137 // If NewAddrMode differs in more than one dimension we cannot handle it. 3138 bool CanHandle = DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::MultipleFields; 3139 3140 // If Scale Field is different then we reject. 3141 CanHandle = CanHandle && DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::ScaleField; 3142 3143 // We also must reject the case when base offset is different and 3144 // scale reg is not null, we cannot handle this case due to merge of 3145 // different offsets will be used as ScaleReg. 3146 CanHandle = CanHandle && (DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField || 3147 !NewAddrMode.ScaledReg); 3148 3149 // We also must reject the case when GV is different and BaseReg installed 3150 // due to we want to use base reg as a merge of GV values. 3151 CanHandle = CanHandle && (DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField || 3152 !NewAddrMode.HasBaseReg); 3153 3154 // Even if NewAddMode is the same we still need to collect it due to 3155 // original value is different. And later we will need all original values 3156 // as anchors during finding the common Phi node. 3157 if (CanHandle) 3158 AddrModes.emplace_back(NewAddrMode); 3159 else 3160 AddrModes.clear(); 3161 3162 return CanHandle; 3163 } 3164 3165 /// Combine the addressing modes we've collected into a single 3166 /// addressing mode. 3167 /// \return True iff we successfully combined them or we only had one so 3168 /// didn't need to combine them anyway. 3169 bool combineAddrModes() { 3170 // If we have no AddrModes then they can't be combined. 3171 if (AddrModes.size() == 0) 3172 return false; 3173 3174 // A single AddrMode can trivially be combined. 3175 if (AddrModes.size() == 1 || DifferentField == ExtAddrMode::NoField) 3176 return true; 3177 3178 // If the AddrModes we collected are all just equal to the value they are 3179 // derived from then combining them wouldn't do anything useful. 3180 if (AllAddrModesTrivial) 3181 return false; 3182 3183 if (!addrModeCombiningAllowed()) 3184 return false; 3185 3186 // Build a map between <original value, basic block where we saw it> to 3187 // value of base register. 3188 // Bail out if there is no common type. 3189 FoldAddrToValueMapping Map; 3190 if (!initializeMap(Map)) 3191 return false; 3192 3193 Value *CommonValue = findCommon(Map); 3194 if (CommonValue) 3195 AddrModes[0].SetCombinedField(DifferentField, CommonValue, AddrModes); 3196 return CommonValue != nullptr; 3197 } 3198 3199 private: 3200 /// Initialize Map with anchor values. For address seen 3201 /// we set the value of different field saw in this address. 3202 /// At the same time we find a common type for different field we will 3203 /// use to create new Phi/Select nodes. Keep it in CommonType field. 3204 /// Return false if there is no common type found. 3205 bool initializeMap(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map) { 3206 // Keep track of keys where the value is null. We will need to replace it 3207 // with constant null when we know the common type. 3208 SmallVector<Value *, 2> NullValue; 3209 Type *IntPtrTy = SQ.DL.getIntPtrType(AddrModes[0].OriginalValue->getType()); 3210 for (auto &AM : AddrModes) { 3211 Value *DV = AM.GetFieldAsValue(DifferentField, IntPtrTy); 3212 if (DV) { 3213 auto *Type = DV->getType(); 3214 if (CommonType && CommonType != Type) 3215 return false; 3216 CommonType = Type; 3217 Map[AM.OriginalValue] = DV; 3218 } else { 3219 NullValue.push_back(AM.OriginalValue); 3220 } 3221 } 3222 assert(CommonType && "At least one non-null value must be!"); 3223 for (auto *V : NullValue) 3224 Map[V] = Constant::getNullValue(CommonType); 3225 return true; 3226 } 3227 3228 /// We have mapping between value A and other value B where B was a field in 3229 /// addressing mode represented by A. Also we have an original value C 3230 /// representing an address we start with. Traversing from C through phi and 3231 /// selects we ended up with A's in a map. This utility function tries to find 3232 /// a value V which is a field in addressing mode C and traversing through phi 3233 /// nodes and selects we will end up in corresponded values B in a map. 3234 /// The utility will create a new Phi/Selects if needed. 3235 // The simple example looks as follows: 3236 // BB1: 3237 // p1 = b1 + 40 3238 // br cond BB2, BB3 3239 // BB2: 3240 // p2 = b2 + 40 3241 // br BB3 3242 // BB3: 3243 // p = phi [p1, BB1], [p2, BB2] 3244 // v = load p 3245 // Map is 3246 // p1 -> b1 3247 // p2 -> b2 3248 // Request is 3249 // p -> ? 3250 // The function tries to find or build phi [b1, BB1], [b2, BB2] in BB3. 3251 Value *findCommon(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map) { 3252 // Tracks the simplification of newly created phi nodes. The reason we use 3253 // this mapping is because we will add new created Phi nodes in AddrToBase. 3254 // Simplification of Phi nodes is recursive, so some Phi node may 3255 // be simplified after we added it to AddrToBase. In reality this 3256 // simplification is possible only if original phi/selects were not 3257 // simplified yet. 3258 // Using this mapping we can find the current value in AddrToBase. 3259 SimplificationTracker ST(SQ); 3260 3261 // First step, DFS to create PHI nodes for all intermediate blocks. 3262 // Also fill traverse order for the second step. 3263 SmallVector<Value *, 32> TraverseOrder; 3264 InsertPlaceholders(Map, TraverseOrder, ST); 3265 3266 // Second Step, fill new nodes by merged values and simplify if possible. 3267 FillPlaceholders(Map, TraverseOrder, ST); 3268 3269 if (!AddrSinkNewSelects && ST.countNewSelectNodes() > 0) { 3270 ST.destroyNewNodes(CommonType); 3271 return nullptr; 3272 } 3273 3274 // Now we'd like to match New Phi nodes to existed ones. 3275 unsigned PhiNotMatchedCount = 0; 3276 if (!MatchPhiSet(ST, AddrSinkNewPhis, PhiNotMatchedCount)) { 3277 ST.destroyNewNodes(CommonType); 3278 return nullptr; 3279 } 3280 3281 auto *Result = ST.Get(Map.find(Original)->second); 3282 if (Result) { 3283 NumMemoryInstsPhiCreated += ST.countNewPhiNodes() + PhiNotMatchedCount; 3284 NumMemoryInstsSelectCreated += ST.countNewSelectNodes(); 3285 } 3286 return Result; 3287 } 3288 3289 /// Try to match PHI node to Candidate. 3290 /// Matcher tracks the matched Phi nodes. 3291 bool MatchPhiNode(PHINode *PHI, PHINode *Candidate, 3292 SmallSetVector<PHIPair, 8> &Matcher, 3293 PhiNodeSet &PhiNodesToMatch) { 3294 SmallVector<PHIPair, 8> WorkList; 3295 Matcher.insert({ PHI, Candidate }); 3296 SmallSet<PHINode *, 8> MatchedPHIs; 3297 MatchedPHIs.insert(PHI); 3298 WorkList.push_back({ PHI, Candidate }); 3299 SmallSet<PHIPair, 8> Visited; 3300 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 3301 auto Item = WorkList.pop_back_val(); 3302 if (!Visited.insert(Item).second) 3303 continue; 3304 // We iterate over all incoming values to Phi to compare them. 3305 // If values are different and both of them Phi and the first one is a 3306 // Phi we added (subject to match) and both of them is in the same basic 3307 // block then we can match our pair if values match. So we state that 3308 // these values match and add it to work list to verify that. 3309 for (auto B : Item.first->blocks()) { 3310 Value *FirstValue = Item.first->getIncomingValueForBlock(B); 3311 Value *SecondValue = Item.second->getIncomingValueForBlock(B); 3312 if (FirstValue == SecondValue) 3313 continue; 3314 3315 PHINode *FirstPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(FirstValue); 3316 PHINode *SecondPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SecondValue); 3317 3318 // One of them is not Phi or 3319 // The first one is not Phi node from the set we'd like to match or 3320 // Phi nodes from different basic blocks then 3321 // we will not be able to match. 3322 if (!FirstPhi || !SecondPhi || !PhiNodesToMatch.count(FirstPhi) || 3323 FirstPhi->getParent() != SecondPhi->getParent()) 3324 return false; 3325 3326 // If we already matched them then continue. 3327 if (Matcher.count({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi })) 3328 continue; 3329 // So the values are different and does not match. So we need them to 3330 // match. (But we register no more than one match per PHI node, so that 3331 // we won't later try to replace them twice.) 3332 if (!MatchedPHIs.insert(FirstPhi).second) 3333 Matcher.insert({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi }); 3334 // But me must check it. 3335 WorkList.push_back({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi }); 3336 } 3337 } 3338 return true; 3339 } 3340 3341 /// For the given set of PHI nodes (in the SimplificationTracker) try 3342 /// to find their equivalents. 3343 /// Returns false if this matching fails and creation of new Phi is disabled. 3344 bool MatchPhiSet(SimplificationTracker &ST, bool AllowNewPhiNodes, 3345 unsigned &PhiNotMatchedCount) { 3346 // Matched and PhiNodesToMatch iterate their elements in a deterministic 3347 // order, so the replacements (ReplacePhi) are also done in a deterministic 3348 // order. 3349 SmallSetVector<PHIPair, 8> Matched; 3350 SmallPtrSet<PHINode *, 8> WillNotMatch; 3351 PhiNodeSet &PhiNodesToMatch = ST.newPhiNodes(); 3352 while (PhiNodesToMatch.size()) { 3353 PHINode *PHI = *PhiNodesToMatch.begin(); 3354 3355 // Add us, if no Phi nodes in the basic block we do not match. 3356 WillNotMatch.clear(); 3357 WillNotMatch.insert(PHI); 3358 3359 // Traverse all Phis until we found equivalent or fail to do that. 3360 bool IsMatched = false; 3361 for (auto &P : PHI->getParent()->phis()) { 3362 if (&P == PHI) 3363 continue; 3364 if ((IsMatched = MatchPhiNode(PHI, &P, Matched, PhiNodesToMatch))) 3365 break; 3366 // If it does not match, collect all Phi nodes from matcher. 3367 // if we end up with no match, them all these Phi nodes will not match 3368 // later. 3369 for (auto M : Matched) 3370 WillNotMatch.insert(M.first); 3371 Matched.clear(); 3372 } 3373 if (IsMatched) { 3374 // Replace all matched values and erase them. 3375 for (auto MV : Matched) 3376 ST.ReplacePhi(MV.first, MV.second); 3377 Matched.clear(); 3378 continue; 3379 } 3380 // If we are not allowed to create new nodes then bail out. 3381 if (!AllowNewPhiNodes) 3382 return false; 3383 // Just remove all seen values in matcher. They will not match anything. 3384 PhiNotMatchedCount += WillNotMatch.size(); 3385 for (auto *P : WillNotMatch) 3386 PhiNodesToMatch.erase(P); 3387 } 3388 return true; 3389 } 3390 /// Fill the placeholders with values from predecessors and simplify them. 3391 void FillPlaceholders(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map, 3392 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &TraverseOrder, 3393 SimplificationTracker &ST) { 3394 while (!TraverseOrder.empty()) { 3395 Value *Current = TraverseOrder.pop_back_val(); 3396 assert(Map.find(Current) != Map.end() && "No node to fill!!!"); 3397 Value *V = Map[Current]; 3398 3399 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) { 3400 // CurrentValue also must be Select. 3401 auto *CurrentSelect = cast<SelectInst>(Current); 3402 auto *TrueValue = CurrentSelect->getTrueValue(); 3403 assert(Map.find(TrueValue) != Map.end() && "No True Value!"); 3404 Select->setTrueValue(ST.Get(Map[TrueValue])); 3405 auto *FalseValue = CurrentSelect->getFalseValue(); 3406 assert(Map.find(FalseValue) != Map.end() && "No False Value!"); 3407 Select->setFalseValue(ST.Get(Map[FalseValue])); 3408 } else { 3409 // Must be a Phi node then. 3410 PHINode *PHI = cast<PHINode>(V); 3411 auto *CurrentPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(Current); 3412 // Fill the Phi node with values from predecessors. 3413 for (auto B : predecessors(PHI->getParent())) { 3414 Value *PV = CurrentPhi->getIncomingValueForBlock(B); 3415 assert(Map.find(PV) != Map.end() && "No predecessor Value!"); 3416 PHI->addIncoming(ST.Get(Map[PV]), B); 3417 } 3418 } 3419 Map[Current] = ST.Simplify(V); 3420 } 3421 } 3422 3423 /// Starting from original value recursively iterates over def-use chain up to 3424 /// known ending values represented in a map. For each traversed phi/select 3425 /// inserts a placeholder Phi or Select. 3426 /// Reports all new created Phi/Select nodes by adding them to set. 3427 /// Also reports and order in what values have been traversed. 3428 void InsertPlaceholders(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map, 3429 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &TraverseOrder, 3430 SimplificationTracker &ST) { 3431 SmallVector<Value *, 32> Worklist; 3432 assert((isa<PHINode>(Original) || isa<SelectInst>(Original)) && 3433 "Address must be a Phi or Select node"); 3434 auto *Dummy = UndefValue::get(CommonType); 3435 Worklist.push_back(Original); 3436 while (!Worklist.empty()) { 3437 Value *Current = Worklist.pop_back_val(); 3438 // if it is already visited or it is an ending value then skip it. 3439 if (Map.find(Current) != Map.end()) 3440 continue; 3441 TraverseOrder.push_back(Current); 3442 3443 // CurrentValue must be a Phi node or select. All others must be covered 3444 // by anchors. 3445 if (SelectInst *CurrentSelect = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Current)) { 3446 // Is it OK to get metadata from OrigSelect?! 3447 // Create a Select placeholder with dummy value. 3448 SelectInst *Select = SelectInst::Create( 3449 CurrentSelect->getCondition(), Dummy, Dummy, 3450 CurrentSelect->getName(), CurrentSelect, CurrentSelect); 3451 Map[Current] = Select; 3452 ST.insertNewSelect(Select); 3453 // We are interested in True and False values. 3454 Worklist.push_back(CurrentSelect->getTrueValue()); 3455 Worklist.push_back(CurrentSelect->getFalseValue()); 3456 } else { 3457 // It must be a Phi node then. 3458 PHINode *CurrentPhi = cast<PHINode>(Current); 3459 unsigned PredCount = CurrentPhi->getNumIncomingValues(); 3460 PHINode *PHI = 3461 PHINode::Create(CommonType, PredCount, "sunk_phi", CurrentPhi); 3462 Map[Current] = PHI; 3463 ST.insertNewPhi(PHI); 3464 for (Value *P : CurrentPhi->incoming_values()) 3465 Worklist.push_back(P); 3466 } 3467 } 3468 } 3469 3470 bool addrModeCombiningAllowed() { 3471 if (DisableComplexAddrModes) 3472 return false; 3473 switch (DifferentField) { 3474 default: 3475 return false; 3476 case ExtAddrMode::BaseRegField: 3477 return AddrSinkCombineBaseReg; 3478 case ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField: 3479 return AddrSinkCombineBaseGV; 3480 case ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField: 3481 return AddrSinkCombineBaseOffs; 3482 case ExtAddrMode::ScaledRegField: 3483 return AddrSinkCombineScaledReg; 3484 } 3485 } 3486 }; 3487 } // end anonymous namespace 3488 3489 /// Try adding ScaleReg*Scale to the current addressing mode. 3490 /// Return true and update AddrMode if this addr mode is legal for the target, 3491 /// false if not. 3492 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, 3493 unsigned Depth) { 3494 // If Scale is 1, then this is the same as adding ScaleReg to the addressing 3495 // mode. Just process that directly. 3496 if (Scale == 1) 3497 return matchAddr(ScaleReg, Depth); 3498 3499 // If the scale is 0, it takes nothing to add this. 3500 if (Scale == 0) 3501 return true; 3502 3503 // If we already have a scale of this value, we can add to it, otherwise, we 3504 // need an available scale field. 3505 if (AddrMode.Scale != 0 && AddrMode.ScaledReg != ScaleReg) 3506 return false; 3507 3508 ExtAddrMode TestAddrMode = AddrMode; 3509 3510 // Add scale to turn X*4+X*3 -> X*7. This could also do things like 3511 // [A+B + A*7] -> [B+A*8]. 3512 TestAddrMode.Scale += Scale; 3513 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = ScaleReg; 3514 3515 // If the new address isn't legal, bail out. 3516 if (!TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 3517 return false; 3518 3519 // It was legal, so commit it. 3520 AddrMode = TestAddrMode; 3521 3522 // Okay, we decided that we can add ScaleReg+Scale to AddrMode. Check now 3523 // to see if ScaleReg is actually X+C. If so, we can turn this into adding 3524 // X*Scale + C*Scale to addr mode. 3525 ConstantInt *CI = nullptr; Value *AddLHS = nullptr; 3526 if (isa<Instruction>(ScaleReg) && // not a constant expr. 3527 match(ScaleReg, m_Add(m_Value(AddLHS), m_ConstantInt(CI)))) { 3528 TestAddrMode.InBounds = false; 3529 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = AddLHS; 3530 TestAddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue()*TestAddrMode.Scale; 3531 3532 // If this addressing mode is legal, commit it and remember that we folded 3533 // this instruction. 3534 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) { 3535 AddrModeInsts.push_back(cast<Instruction>(ScaleReg)); 3536 AddrMode = TestAddrMode; 3537 return true; 3538 } 3539 } 3540 3541 // Otherwise, not (x+c)*scale, just return what we have. 3542 return true; 3543 } 3544 3545 /// This is a little filter, which returns true if an addressing computation 3546 /// involving I might be folded into a load/store accessing it. 3547 /// This doesn't need to be perfect, but needs to accept at least 3548 /// the set of instructions that MatchOperationAddr can. 3549 static bool MightBeFoldableInst(Instruction *I) { 3550 switch (I->getOpcode()) { 3551 case Instruction::BitCast: 3552 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast: 3553 // Don't touch identity bitcasts. 3554 if (I->getType() == I->getOperand(0)->getType()) 3555 return false; 3556 return I->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy(); 3557 case Instruction::PtrToInt: 3558 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized. 3559 return true; 3560 case Instruction::IntToPtr: 3561 // We know the input is intptr_t, so this is foldable. 3562 return true; 3563 case Instruction::Add: 3564 return true; 3565 case Instruction::Mul: 3566 case Instruction::Shl: 3567 // Can only handle X*C and X << C. 3568 return isa<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1)); 3569 case Instruction::GetElementPtr: 3570 return true; 3571 default: 3572 return false; 3573 } 3574 } 3575 3576 /// Check whether or not \p Val is a legal instruction for \p TLI. 3577 /// \note \p Val is assumed to be the product of some type promotion. 3578 /// Therefore if \p Val has an undefined state in \p TLI, this is assumed 3579 /// to be legal, as the non-promoted value would have had the same state. 3580 static bool isPromotedInstructionLegal(const TargetLowering &TLI, 3581 const DataLayout &DL, Value *Val) { 3582 Instruction *PromotedInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val); 3583 if (!PromotedInst) 3584 return false; 3585 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(PromotedInst->getOpcode()); 3586 // If the ISDOpcode is undefined, it was undefined before the promotion. 3587 if (!ISDOpcode) 3588 return true; 3589 // Otherwise, check if the promoted instruction is legal or not. 3590 return TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom( 3591 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, PromotedInst->getType())); 3592 } 3593 3594 namespace { 3595 3596 /// Hepler class to perform type promotion. 3597 class TypePromotionHelper { 3598 /// Utility function to add a promoted instruction \p ExtOpnd to 3599 /// \p PromotedInsts and record the type of extension we have seen. 3600 static void addPromotedInst(InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3601 Instruction *ExtOpnd, 3602 bool IsSExt) { 3603 ExtType ExtTy = IsSExt ? SignExtension : ZeroExtension; 3604 InstrToOrigTy::iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(ExtOpnd); 3605 if (It != PromotedInsts.end()) { 3606 // If the new extension is same as original, the information in 3607 // PromotedInsts[ExtOpnd] is still correct. 3608 if (It->second.getInt() == ExtTy) 3609 return; 3610 3611 // Now the new extension is different from old extension, we make 3612 // the type information invalid by setting extension type to 3613 // BothExtension. 3614 ExtTy = BothExtension; 3615 } 3616 PromotedInsts[ExtOpnd] = TypeIsSExt(ExtOpnd->getType(), ExtTy); 3617 } 3618 3619 /// Utility function to query the original type of instruction \p Opnd 3620 /// with a matched extension type. If the extension doesn't match, we 3621 /// cannot use the information we had on the original type. 3622 /// BothExtension doesn't match any extension type. 3623 static const Type *getOrigType(const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3624 Instruction *Opnd, 3625 bool IsSExt) { 3626 ExtType ExtTy = IsSExt ? SignExtension : ZeroExtension; 3627 InstrToOrigTy::const_iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(Opnd); 3628 if (It != PromotedInsts.end() && It->second.getInt() == ExtTy) 3629 return It->second.getPointer(); 3630 return nullptr; 3631 } 3632 3633 /// Utility function to check whether or not a sign or zero extension 3634 /// of \p Inst with \p ConsideredExtType can be moved through \p Inst by 3635 /// either using the operands of \p Inst or promoting \p Inst. 3636 /// The type of the extension is defined by \p IsSExt. 3637 /// In other words, check if: 3638 /// ext (Ty Inst opnd1 opnd2 ... opndN) to ConsideredExtType. 3639 /// #1 Promotion applies: 3640 /// ConsideredExtType Inst (ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType, ...). 3641 /// #2 Operand reuses: 3642 /// ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType. 3643 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3644 static bool canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, Type *ConsideredExtType, 3645 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, bool IsSExt); 3646 3647 /// Utility function to determine if \p OpIdx should be promoted when 3648 /// promoting \p Inst. 3649 static bool shouldExtOperand(const Instruction *Inst, int OpIdx) { 3650 return !(isa<SelectInst>(Inst) && OpIdx == 0); 3651 } 3652 3653 /// Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this 3654 /// operand is a promotable trunc or sext or zext. 3655 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3656 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all instructions 3657 /// created to promote the operand of Ext. 3658 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts. 3659 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs. 3660 /// Should never be called directly. 3661 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext. 3662 static Value *promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt( 3663 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3664 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3665 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3666 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI); 3667 3668 /// Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this 3669 /// operand is promotable and is not a supported trunc or sext. 3670 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3671 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all the instructions 3672 /// created to promote the operand of Ext. 3673 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts. 3674 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs. 3675 /// Should never be called directly. 3676 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext. 3677 static Value *promoteOperandForOther(Instruction *Ext, 3678 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3679 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3680 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3681 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3682 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, 3683 const TargetLowering &TLI, bool IsSExt); 3684 3685 /// \see promoteOperandForOther. 3686 static Value *signExtendOperandForOther( 3687 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3688 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3689 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3690 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 3691 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, 3692 Exts, Truncs, TLI, true); 3693 } 3694 3695 /// \see promoteOperandForOther. 3696 static Value *zeroExtendOperandForOther( 3697 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3698 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3699 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3700 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 3701 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, 3702 Exts, Truncs, TLI, false); 3703 } 3704 3705 public: 3706 /// Type for the utility function that promotes the operand of Ext. 3707 using Action = Value *(*)(Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3708 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3709 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3710 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3711 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, 3712 const TargetLowering &TLI); 3713 3714 /// Given a sign/zero extend instruction \p Ext, return the appropriate 3715 /// action to promote the operand of \p Ext instead of using Ext. 3716 /// \return NULL if no promotable action is possible with the current 3717 /// sign extension. 3718 /// \p InsertedInsts keeps track of all the instructions inserted by the 3719 /// other CodeGenPrepare optimizations. This information is important 3720 /// because we do not want to promote these instructions as CodeGenPrepare 3721 /// will reinsert them later. Thus creating an infinite loop: create/remove. 3722 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3723 static Action getAction(Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, 3724 const TargetLowering &TLI, 3725 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts); 3726 }; 3727 3728 } // end anonymous namespace 3729 3730 bool TypePromotionHelper::canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, 3731 Type *ConsideredExtType, 3732 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3733 bool IsSExt) { 3734 // The promotion helper does not know how to deal with vector types yet. 3735 // To be able to fix that, we would need to fix the places where we 3736 // statically extend, e.g., constants and such. 3737 if (Inst->getType()->isVectorTy()) 3738 return false; 3739 3740 // We can always get through zext. 3741 if (isa<ZExtInst>(Inst)) 3742 return true; 3743 3744 // sext(sext) is ok too. 3745 if (IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Inst)) 3746 return true; 3747 3748 // We can get through binary operator, if it is legal. In other words, the 3749 // binary operator must have a nuw or nsw flag. 3750 const BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(Inst); 3751 if (BinOp && isa<OverflowingBinaryOperator>(BinOp) && 3752 ((!IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoUnsignedWrap()) || 3753 (IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoSignedWrap()))) 3754 return true; 3755 3756 // ext(and(opnd, cst)) --> and(ext(opnd), ext(cst)) 3757 if ((Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::And || 3758 Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or)) 3759 return true; 3760 3761 // ext(xor(opnd, cst)) --> xor(ext(opnd), ext(cst)) 3762 if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Xor) { 3763 const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Inst->getOperand(1)); 3764 // Make sure it is not a NOT. 3765 if (Cst && !Cst->getValue().isAllOnesValue()) 3766 return true; 3767 } 3768 3769 // zext(shrl(opnd, cst)) --> shrl(zext(opnd), zext(cst)) 3770 // It may change a poisoned value into a regular value, like 3771 // zext i32 (shrl i8 %val, 12) --> shrl i32 (zext i8 %val), 12 3772 // poisoned value regular value 3773 // It should be OK since undef covers valid value. 3774 if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr && !IsSExt) 3775 return true; 3776 3777 // and(ext(shl(opnd, cst)), cst) --> and(shl(ext(opnd), ext(cst)), cst) 3778 // It may change a poisoned value into a regular value, like 3779 // zext i32 (shl i8 %val, 12) --> shl i32 (zext i8 %val), 12 3780 // poisoned value regular value 3781 // It should be OK since undef covers valid value. 3782 if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Shl && Inst->hasOneUse()) { 3783 const Instruction *ExtInst = 3784 dyn_cast<const Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin()); 3785 if (ExtInst->hasOneUse()) { 3786 const Instruction *AndInst = 3787 dyn_cast<const Instruction>(*ExtInst->user_begin()); 3788 if (AndInst && AndInst->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) { 3789 const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AndInst->getOperand(1)); 3790 if (Cst && 3791 Cst->getValue().isIntN(Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth())) 3792 return true; 3793 } 3794 } 3795 } 3796 3797 // Check if we can do the following simplification. 3798 // ext(trunc(opnd)) --> ext(opnd) 3799 if (!isa<TruncInst>(Inst)) 3800 return false; 3801 3802 Value *OpndVal = Inst->getOperand(0); 3803 // Check if we can use this operand in the extension. 3804 // If the type is larger than the result type of the extension, we cannot. 3805 if (!OpndVal->getType()->isIntegerTy() || 3806 OpndVal->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() > 3807 ConsideredExtType->getIntegerBitWidth()) 3808 return false; 3809 3810 // If the operand of the truncate is not an instruction, we will not have 3811 // any information on the dropped bits. 3812 // (Actually we could for constant but it is not worth the extra logic). 3813 Instruction *Opnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OpndVal); 3814 if (!Opnd) 3815 return false; 3816 3817 // Check if the source of the type is narrow enough. 3818 // I.e., check that trunc just drops extended bits of the same kind of 3819 // the extension. 3820 // #1 get the type of the operand and check the kind of the extended bits. 3821 const Type *OpndType = getOrigType(PromotedInsts, Opnd, IsSExt); 3822 if (OpndType) 3823 ; 3824 else if ((IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Opnd)) || (!IsSExt && isa<ZExtInst>(Opnd))) 3825 OpndType = Opnd->getOperand(0)->getType(); 3826 else 3827 return false; 3828 3829 // #2 check that the truncate just drops extended bits. 3830 return Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >= 3831 OpndType->getIntegerBitWidth(); 3832 } 3833 3834 TypePromotionHelper::Action TypePromotionHelper::getAction( 3835 Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, 3836 const TargetLowering &TLI, const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts) { 3837 assert((isa<SExtInst>(Ext) || isa<ZExtInst>(Ext)) && 3838 "Unexpected instruction type"); 3839 Instruction *ExtOpnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0)); 3840 Type *ExtTy = Ext->getType(); 3841 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(Ext); 3842 // If the operand of the extension is not an instruction, we cannot 3843 // get through. 3844 // If it, check we can get through. 3845 if (!ExtOpnd || !canGetThrough(ExtOpnd, ExtTy, PromotedInsts, IsSExt)) 3846 return nullptr; 3847 3848 // Do not promote if the operand has been added by codegenprepare. 3849 // Otherwise, it means we are undoing an optimization that is likely to be 3850 // redone, thus causing potential infinite loop. 3851 if (isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) && InsertedInsts.count(ExtOpnd)) 3852 return nullptr; 3853 3854 // SExt or Trunc instructions. 3855 // Return the related handler. 3856 if (isa<SExtInst>(ExtOpnd) || isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) || 3857 isa<ZExtInst>(ExtOpnd)) 3858 return promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt; 3859 3860 // Regular instruction. 3861 // Abort early if we will have to insert non-free instructions. 3862 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse() && !TLI.isTruncateFree(ExtTy, ExtOpnd->getType())) 3863 return nullptr; 3864 return IsSExt ? signExtendOperandForOther : zeroExtendOperandForOther; 3865 } 3866 3867 Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt( 3868 Instruction *SExt, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3869 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3870 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3871 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 3872 // By construction, the operand of SExt is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot 3873 // get through it and this method should not be called. 3874 Instruction *SExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(SExt->getOperand(0)); 3875 Value *ExtVal = SExt; 3876 bool HasMergedNonFreeExt = false; 3877 if (isa<ZExtInst>(SExtOpnd)) { 3878 // Replace s|zext(zext(opnd)) 3879 // => zext(opnd). 3880 HasMergedNonFreeExt = !TLI.isExtFree(SExtOpnd); 3881 Value *ZExt = 3882 TPT.createZExt(SExt, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0), SExt->getType()); 3883 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(SExt, ZExt); 3884 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExt); 3885 ExtVal = ZExt; 3886 } else { 3887 // Replace z|sext(trunc(opnd)) or sext(sext(opnd)) 3888 // => z|sext(opnd). 3889 TPT.setOperand(SExt, 0, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0)); 3890 } 3891 CreatedInstsCost = 0; 3892 3893 // Remove dead code. 3894 if (SExtOpnd->use_empty()) 3895 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExtOpnd); 3896 3897 // Check if the extension is still needed. 3898 Instruction *ExtInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(ExtVal); 3899 if (!ExtInst || ExtInst->getType() != ExtInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) { 3900 if (ExtInst) { 3901 if (Exts) 3902 Exts->push_back(ExtInst); 3903 CreatedInstsCost = !TLI.isExtFree(ExtInst) && !HasMergedNonFreeExt; 3904 } 3905 return ExtVal; 3906 } 3907 3908 // At this point we have: ext ty opnd to ty. 3909 // Reassign the uses of ExtInst to the opnd and remove ExtInst. 3910 Value *NextVal = ExtInst->getOperand(0); 3911 TPT.eraseInstruction(ExtInst, NextVal); 3912 return NextVal; 3913 } 3914 3915 Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForOther( 3916 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3917 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3918 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3919 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI, 3920 bool IsSExt) { 3921 // By construction, the operand of Ext is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot 3922 // get through it and this method should not be called. 3923 Instruction *ExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0)); 3924 CreatedInstsCost = 0; 3925 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse()) { 3926 // ExtOpnd will be promoted. 3927 // All its uses, but Ext, will need to use a truncated value of the 3928 // promoted version. 3929 // Create the truncate now. 3930 Value *Trunc = TPT.createTrunc(Ext, ExtOpnd->getType()); 3931 if (Instruction *ITrunc = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Trunc)) { 3932 // Insert it just after the definition. 3933 ITrunc->moveAfter(ExtOpnd); 3934 if (Truncs) 3935 Truncs->push_back(ITrunc); 3936 } 3937 3938 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(ExtOpnd, Trunc); 3939 // Restore the operand of Ext (which has been replaced by the previous call 3940 // to replaceAllUsesWith) to avoid creating a cycle trunc <-> sext. 3941 TPT.setOperand(Ext, 0, ExtOpnd); 3942 } 3943 3944 // Get through the Instruction: 3945 // 1. Update its type. 3946 // 2. Replace the uses of Ext by Inst. 3947 // 3. Extend each operand that needs to be extended. 3948 3949 // Remember the original type of the instruction before promotion. 3950 // This is useful to know that the high bits are sign extended bits. 3951 addPromotedInst(PromotedInsts, ExtOpnd, IsSExt); 3952 // Step #1. 3953 TPT.mutateType(ExtOpnd, Ext->getType()); 3954 // Step #2. 3955 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(Ext, ExtOpnd); 3956 // Step #3. 3957 Instruction *ExtForOpnd = Ext; 3958 3959 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Propagate Ext to operands\n"); 3960 for (int OpIdx = 0, EndOpIdx = ExtOpnd->getNumOperands(); OpIdx != EndOpIdx; 3961 ++OpIdx) { 3962 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Operand:\n" << *(ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)) << '\n'); 3963 if (ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType() == Ext->getType() || 3964 !shouldExtOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx)) { 3965 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "No need to propagate\n"); 3966 continue; 3967 } 3968 // Check if we can statically extend the operand. 3969 Value *Opnd = ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx); 3970 if (const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Opnd)) { 3971 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n"); 3972 unsigned BitWidth = Ext->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth(); 3973 APInt CstVal = IsSExt ? Cst->getValue().sext(BitWidth) 3974 : Cst->getValue().zext(BitWidth); 3975 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ConstantInt::get(Ext->getType(), CstVal)); 3976 continue; 3977 } 3978 // UndefValue are typed, so we have to statically sign extend them. 3979 if (isa<UndefValue>(Opnd)) { 3980 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n"); 3981 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, UndefValue::get(Ext->getType())); 3982 continue; 3983 } 3984 3985 // Otherwise we have to explicitly sign extend the operand. 3986 // Check if Ext was reused to extend an operand. 3987 if (!ExtForOpnd) { 3988 // If yes, create a new one. 3989 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "More operands to ext\n"); 3990 Value *ValForExtOpnd = IsSExt ? TPT.createSExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType()) 3991 : TPT.createZExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType()); 3992 if (!isa<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd)) { 3993 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ValForExtOpnd); 3994 continue; 3995 } 3996 ExtForOpnd = cast<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd); 3997 } 3998 if (Exts) 3999 Exts->push_back(ExtForOpnd); 4000 TPT.setOperand(ExtForOpnd, 0, Opnd); 4001 4002 // Move the sign extension before the insertion point. 4003 TPT.moveBefore(ExtForOpnd, ExtOpnd); 4004 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ExtForOpnd); 4005 CreatedInstsCost += !TLI.isExtFree(ExtForOpnd); 4006 // If more sext are required, new instructions will have to be created. 4007 ExtForOpnd = nullptr; 4008 } 4009 if (ExtForOpnd == Ext) { 4010 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Extension is useless now\n"); 4011 TPT.eraseInstruction(Ext); 4012 } 4013 return ExtOpnd; 4014 } 4015 4016 /// Check whether or not promoting an instruction to a wider type is profitable. 4017 /// \p NewCost gives the cost of extension instructions created by the 4018 /// promotion. 4019 /// \p OldCost gives the cost of extension instructions before the promotion 4020 /// plus the number of instructions that have been 4021 /// matched in the addressing mode the promotion. 4022 /// \p PromotedOperand is the value that has been promoted. 4023 /// \return True if the promotion is profitable, false otherwise. 4024 bool AddressingModeMatcher::isPromotionProfitable( 4025 unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, Value *PromotedOperand) const { 4026 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "OldCost: " << OldCost << "\tNewCost: " << NewCost 4027 << '\n'); 4028 // The cost of the new extensions is greater than the cost of the 4029 // old extension plus what we folded. 4030 // This is not profitable. 4031 if (NewCost > OldCost) 4032 return false; 4033 if (NewCost < OldCost) 4034 return true; 4035 // The promotion is neutral but it may help folding the sign extension in 4036 // loads for instance. 4037 // Check that we did not create an illegal instruction. 4038 return isPromotedInstructionLegal(TLI, DL, PromotedOperand); 4039 } 4040 4041 /// Given an instruction or constant expr, see if we can fold the operation 4042 /// into the addressing mode. If so, update the addressing mode and return 4043 /// true, otherwise return false without modifying AddrMode. 4044 /// If \p MovedAway is not NULL, it contains the information of whether or 4045 /// not AddrInst has to be folded into the addressing mode on success. 4046 /// If \p MovedAway == true, \p AddrInst will not be part of the addressing 4047 /// because it has been moved away. 4048 /// Thus AddrInst must not be added in the matched instructions. 4049 /// This state can happen when AddrInst is a sext, since it may be moved away. 4050 /// Therefore, AddrInst may not be valid when MovedAway is true and it must 4051 /// not be referenced anymore. 4052 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode, 4053 unsigned Depth, 4054 bool *MovedAway) { 4055 // Avoid exponential behavior on extremely deep expression trees. 4056 if (Depth >= 5) return false; 4057 4058 // By default, all matched instructions stay in place. 4059 if (MovedAway) 4060 *MovedAway = false; 4061 4062 switch (Opcode) { 4063 case Instruction::PtrToInt: 4064 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized. 4065 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 4066 case Instruction::IntToPtr: { 4067 auto AS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 4068 auto PtrTy = MVT::getIntegerVT(DL.getPointerSizeInBits(AS)); 4069 // This inttoptr is a no-op if the integer type is pointer sized. 4070 if (TLI.getValueType(DL, AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) == PtrTy) 4071 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 4072 return false; 4073 } 4074 case Instruction::BitCast: 4075 // BitCast is always a noop, and we can handle it as long as it is 4076 // int->int or pointer->pointer (we don't want int<->fp or something). 4077 if (AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy() && 4078 // Don't touch identity bitcasts. These were probably put here by LSR, 4079 // and we don't want to mess around with them. Assume it knows what it 4080 // is doing. 4081 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType() != AddrInst->getType()) 4082 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 4083 return false; 4084 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast: { 4085 unsigned SrcAS 4086 = AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 4087 unsigned DestAS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 4088 if (TLI.isNoopAddrSpaceCast(SrcAS, DestAS)) 4089 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 4090 return false; 4091 } 4092 case Instruction::Add: { 4093 // Check to see if we can merge in the RHS then the LHS. If so, we win. 4094 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 4095 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 4096 // Start a transaction at this point. 4097 // The LHS may match but not the RHS. 4098 // Therefore, we need a higher level restoration point to undo partially 4099 // matched operation. 4100 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4101 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4102 4103 AddrMode.InBounds = false; 4104 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1) && 4105 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) 4106 return true; 4107 4108 // Restore the old addr mode info. 4109 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4110 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4111 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4112 4113 // Otherwise this was over-aggressive. Try merging in the LHS then the RHS. 4114 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1) && 4115 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1)) 4116 return true; 4117 4118 // Otherwise we definitely can't merge the ADD in. 4119 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4120 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4121 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4122 break; 4123 } 4124 //case Instruction::Or: 4125 // TODO: We can handle "Or Val, Imm" iff this OR is equivalent to an ADD. 4126 //break; 4127 case Instruction::Mul: 4128 case Instruction::Shl: { 4129 // Can only handle X*C and X << C. 4130 AddrMode.InBounds = false; 4131 ConstantInt *RHS = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(1)); 4132 if (!RHS || RHS->getBitWidth() > 64) 4133 return false; 4134 int64_t Scale = RHS->getSExtValue(); 4135 if (Opcode == Instruction::Shl) 4136 Scale = 1LL << Scale; 4137 4138 return matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Scale, Depth); 4139 } 4140 case Instruction::GetElementPtr: { 4141 // Scan the GEP. We check it if it contains constant offsets and at most 4142 // one variable offset. 4143 int VariableOperand = -1; 4144 unsigned VariableScale = 0; 4145 4146 int64_t ConstantOffset = 0; 4147 gep_type_iterator GTI = gep_type_begin(AddrInst); 4148 for (unsigned i = 1, e = AddrInst->getNumOperands(); i != e; ++i, ++GTI) { 4149 if (StructType *STy = GTI.getStructTypeOrNull()) { 4150 const StructLayout *SL = DL.getStructLayout(STy); 4151 unsigned Idx = 4152 cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))->getZExtValue(); 4153 ConstantOffset += SL->getElementOffset(Idx); 4154 } else { 4155 uint64_t TypeSize = DL.getTypeAllocSize(GTI.getIndexedType()); 4156 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))) { 4157 const APInt &CVal = CI->getValue(); 4158 if (CVal.getMinSignedBits() <= 64) { 4159 ConstantOffset += CVal.getSExtValue() * TypeSize; 4160 continue; 4161 } 4162 } 4163 if (TypeSize) { // Scales of zero don't do anything. 4164 // We only allow one variable index at the moment. 4165 if (VariableOperand != -1) 4166 return false; 4167 4168 // Remember the variable index. 4169 VariableOperand = i; 4170 VariableScale = TypeSize; 4171 } 4172 } 4173 } 4174 4175 // A common case is for the GEP to only do a constant offset. In this case, 4176 // just add it to the disp field and check validity. 4177 if (VariableOperand == -1) { 4178 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset; 4179 if (ConstantOffset == 0 || 4180 TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) { 4181 // Check to see if we can fold the base pointer in too. 4182 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) { 4183 if (!cast<GEPOperator>(AddrInst)->isInBounds()) 4184 AddrMode.InBounds = false; 4185 return true; 4186 } 4187 } else if (EnableGEPOffsetSplit && isa<GetElementPtrInst>(AddrInst) && 4188 TLI.shouldConsiderGEPOffsetSplit() && Depth == 0 && 4189 ConstantOffset > 0) { 4190 // Record GEPs with non-zero offsets as candidates for splitting in the 4191 // event that the offset cannot fit into the r+i addressing mode. 4192 // Simple and common case that only one GEP is used in calculating the 4193 // address for the memory access. 4194 Value *Base = AddrInst->getOperand(0); 4195 auto *BaseI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Base); 4196 auto *GEP = cast<GetElementPtrInst>(AddrInst); 4197 if (isa<Argument>(Base) || isa<GlobalValue>(Base) || 4198 (BaseI && !isa<CastInst>(BaseI) && 4199 !isa<GetElementPtrInst>(BaseI))) { 4200 // If the base is an instruction, make sure the GEP is not in the same 4201 // basic block as the base. If the base is an argument or global 4202 // value, make sure the GEP is not in the entry block. Otherwise, 4203 // instruction selection can undo the split. Also make sure the 4204 // parent block allows inserting non-PHI instructions before the 4205 // terminator. 4206 BasicBlock *Parent = 4207 BaseI ? BaseI->getParent() : &GEP->getFunction()->getEntryBlock(); 4208 if (GEP->getParent() != Parent && !Parent->getTerminator()->isEHPad()) 4209 LargeOffsetGEP = std::make_pair(GEP, ConstantOffset); 4210 } 4211 } 4212 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= ConstantOffset; 4213 return false; 4214 } 4215 4216 // Save the valid addressing mode in case we can't match. 4217 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 4218 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 4219 4220 // See if the scale and offset amount is valid for this target. 4221 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset; 4222 if (!cast<GEPOperator>(AddrInst)->isInBounds()) 4223 AddrMode.InBounds = false; 4224 4225 // Match the base operand of the GEP. 4226 if (!matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) { 4227 // If it couldn't be matched, just stuff the value in a register. 4228 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) { 4229 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4230 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4231 return false; 4232 } 4233 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true; 4234 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0); 4235 } 4236 4237 // Match the remaining variable portion of the GEP. 4238 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), VariableScale, 4239 Depth)) { 4240 // If it couldn't be matched, try stuffing the base into a register 4241 // instead of matching it, and retrying the match of the scale. 4242 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4243 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4244 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) 4245 return false; 4246 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true; 4247 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0); 4248 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset; 4249 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), 4250 VariableScale, Depth)) { 4251 // If even that didn't work, bail. 4252 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4253 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4254 return false; 4255 } 4256 } 4257 4258 return true; 4259 } 4260 case Instruction::SExt: 4261 case Instruction::ZExt: { 4262 Instruction *Ext = dyn_cast<Instruction>(AddrInst); 4263 if (!Ext) 4264 return false; 4265 4266 // Try to move this ext out of the way of the addressing mode. 4267 // Ask for a method for doing so. 4268 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH = 4269 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(Ext, InsertedInsts, TLI, PromotedInsts); 4270 if (!TPH) 4271 return false; 4272 4273 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4274 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4275 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0; 4276 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI.isExtFree(Ext); 4277 Value *PromotedOperand = 4278 TPH(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, nullptr, nullptr, TLI); 4279 // SExt has been moved away. 4280 // Thus either it will be rematched later in the recursive calls or it is 4281 // gone. Anyway, we must not fold it into the addressing mode at this point. 4282 // E.g., 4283 // op = add opnd, 1 4284 // idx = ext op 4285 // addr = gep base, idx 4286 // is now: 4287 // promotedOpnd = ext opnd <- no match here 4288 // op = promoted_add promotedOpnd, 1 <- match (later in recursive calls) 4289 // addr = gep base, op <- match 4290 if (MovedAway) 4291 *MovedAway = true; 4292 4293 assert(PromotedOperand && 4294 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases"); 4295 4296 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 4297 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 4298 4299 if (!matchAddr(PromotedOperand, Depth) || 4300 // The total of the new cost is equal to the cost of the created 4301 // instructions. 4302 // The total of the old cost is equal to the cost of the extension plus 4303 // what we have saved in the addressing mode. 4304 !isPromotionProfitable(CreatedInstsCost, 4305 ExtCost + (AddrModeInsts.size() - OldSize), 4306 PromotedOperand)) { 4307 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4308 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4309 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Sign extension does not pay off: rollback\n"); 4310 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4311 return false; 4312 } 4313 return true; 4314 } 4315 } 4316 return false; 4317 } 4318 4319 /// If we can, try to add the value of 'Addr' into the current addressing mode. 4320 /// If Addr can't be added to AddrMode this returns false and leaves AddrMode 4321 /// unmodified. This assumes that Addr is either a pointer type or intptr_t 4322 /// for the target. 4323 /// 4324 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth) { 4325 // Start a transaction at this point that we will rollback if the matching 4326 // fails. 4327 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4328 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4329 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Addr)) { 4330 // Fold in immediates if legal for the target. 4331 AddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue(); 4332 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4333 return true; 4334 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= CI->getSExtValue(); 4335 } else if (GlobalValue *GV = dyn_cast<GlobalValue>(Addr)) { 4336 // If this is a global variable, try to fold it into the addressing mode. 4337 if (!AddrMode.BaseGV) { 4338 AddrMode.BaseGV = GV; 4339 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4340 return true; 4341 AddrMode.BaseGV = nullptr; 4342 } 4343 } else if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Addr)) { 4344 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 4345 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 4346 4347 // Check to see if it is possible to fold this operation. 4348 bool MovedAway = false; 4349 if (matchOperationAddr(I, I->getOpcode(), Depth, &MovedAway)) { 4350 // This instruction may have been moved away. If so, there is nothing 4351 // to check here. 4352 if (MovedAway) 4353 return true; 4354 // Okay, it's possible to fold this. Check to see if it is actually 4355 // *profitable* to do so. We use a simple cost model to avoid increasing 4356 // register pressure too much. 4357 if (I->hasOneUse() || 4358 isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(I, BackupAddrMode, AddrMode)) { 4359 AddrModeInsts.push_back(I); 4360 return true; 4361 } 4362 4363 // It isn't profitable to do this, roll back. 4364 //cerr << "NOT FOLDING: " << *I; 4365 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4366 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4367 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4368 } 4369 } else if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Addr)) { 4370 if (matchOperationAddr(CE, CE->getOpcode(), Depth)) 4371 return true; 4372 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4373 } else if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(Addr)) { 4374 // Null pointer gets folded without affecting the addressing mode. 4375 return true; 4376 } 4377 4378 // Worse case, the target should support [reg] addressing modes. :) 4379 if (!AddrMode.HasBaseReg) { 4380 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true; 4381 AddrMode.BaseReg = Addr; 4382 // Still check for legality in case the target supports [imm] but not [i+r]. 4383 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4384 return true; 4385 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = false; 4386 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr; 4387 } 4388 4389 // If the base register is already taken, see if we can do [r+r]. 4390 if (AddrMode.Scale == 0) { 4391 AddrMode.Scale = 1; 4392 AddrMode.ScaledReg = Addr; 4393 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4394 return true; 4395 AddrMode.Scale = 0; 4396 AddrMode.ScaledReg = nullptr; 4397 } 4398 // Couldn't match. 4399 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4400 return false; 4401 } 4402 4403 /// Check to see if all uses of OpVal by the specified inline asm call are due 4404 /// to memory operands. If so, return true, otherwise return false. 4405 static bool IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CallInst *CI, InlineAsm *IA, Value *OpVal, 4406 const TargetLowering &TLI, 4407 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI) { 4408 const Function *F = CI->getFunction(); 4409 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints = 4410 TLI.ParseConstraints(F->getParent()->getDataLayout(), &TRI, 4411 ImmutableCallSite(CI)); 4412 4413 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) { 4414 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i]; 4415 4416 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use. 4417 TLI.ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue()); 4418 4419 // If this asm operand is our Value*, and if it isn't an indirect memory 4420 // operand, we can't fold it! 4421 if (OpInfo.CallOperandVal == OpVal && 4422 (OpInfo.ConstraintType != TargetLowering::C_Memory || 4423 !OpInfo.isIndirect)) 4424 return false; 4425 } 4426 4427 return true; 4428 } 4429 4430 // Max number of memory uses to look at before aborting the search to conserve 4431 // compile time. 4432 static constexpr int MaxMemoryUsesToScan = 20; 4433 4434 /// Recursively walk all the uses of I until we find a memory use. 4435 /// If we find an obviously non-foldable instruction, return true. 4436 /// Add the ultimately found memory instructions to MemoryUses. 4437 static bool FindAllMemoryUses( 4438 Instruction *I, 4439 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<Instruction *, unsigned>> &MemoryUses, 4440 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &ConsideredInsts, const TargetLowering &TLI, 4441 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, int SeenInsts = 0) { 4442 // If we already considered this instruction, we're done. 4443 if (!ConsideredInsts.insert(I).second) 4444 return false; 4445 4446 // If this is an obviously unfoldable instruction, bail out. 4447 if (!MightBeFoldableInst(I)) 4448 return true; 4449 4450 const bool OptSize = I->getFunction()->optForSize(); 4451 4452 // Loop over all the uses, recursively processing them. 4453 for (Use &U : I->uses()) { 4454 // Conservatively return true if we're seeing a large number or a deep chain 4455 // of users. This avoids excessive compilation times in pathological cases. 4456 if (SeenInsts++ >= MaxMemoryUsesToScan) 4457 return true; 4458 4459 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser()); 4460 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(UserI)) { 4461 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(LI, U.getOperandNo())); 4462 continue; 4463 } 4464 4465 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(UserI)) { 4466 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo(); 4467 if (opNo != StoreInst::getPointerOperandIndex()) 4468 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr. 4469 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(SI, opNo)); 4470 continue; 4471 } 4472 4473 if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(UserI)) { 4474 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo(); 4475 if (opNo != AtomicRMWInst::getPointerOperandIndex()) 4476 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr. 4477 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(RMW, opNo)); 4478 continue; 4479 } 4480 4481 if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(UserI)) { 4482 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo(); 4483 if (opNo != AtomicCmpXchgInst::getPointerOperandIndex()) 4484 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr. 4485 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(CmpX, opNo)); 4486 continue; 4487 } 4488 4489 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(UserI)) { 4490 // If this is a cold call, we can sink the addressing calculation into 4491 // the cold path. See optimizeCallInst 4492 if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold)) 4493 continue; 4494 4495 InlineAsm *IA = dyn_cast<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue()); 4496 if (!IA) return true; 4497 4498 // If this is a memory operand, we're cool, otherwise bail out. 4499 if (!IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CI, IA, I, TLI, TRI)) 4500 return true; 4501 continue; 4502 } 4503 4504 if (FindAllMemoryUses(UserI, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI, 4505 SeenInsts)) 4506 return true; 4507 } 4508 4509 return false; 4510 } 4511 4512 /// Return true if Val is already known to be live at the use site that we're 4513 /// folding it into. If so, there is no cost to include it in the addressing 4514 /// mode. KnownLive1 and KnownLive2 are two values that we know are live at the 4515 /// instruction already. 4516 bool AddressingModeMatcher::valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val,Value *KnownLive1, 4517 Value *KnownLive2) { 4518 // If Val is either of the known-live values, we know it is live! 4519 if (Val == nullptr || Val == KnownLive1 || Val == KnownLive2) 4520 return true; 4521 4522 // All values other than instructions and arguments (e.g. constants) are live. 4523 if (!isa<Instruction>(Val) && !isa<Argument>(Val)) return true; 4524 4525 // If Val is a constant sized alloca in the entry block, it is live, this is 4526 // true because it is just a reference to the stack/frame pointer, which is 4527 // live for the whole function. 4528 if (AllocaInst *AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) 4529 if (AI->isStaticAlloca()) 4530 return true; 4531 4532 // Check to see if this value is already used in the memory instruction's 4533 // block. If so, it's already live into the block at the very least, so we 4534 // can reasonably fold it. 4535 return Val->isUsedInBasicBlock(MemoryInst->getParent()); 4536 } 4537 4538 /// It is possible for the addressing mode of the machine to fold the specified 4539 /// instruction into a load or store that ultimately uses it. 4540 /// However, the specified instruction has multiple uses. 4541 /// Given this, it may actually increase register pressure to fold it 4542 /// into the load. For example, consider this code: 4543 /// 4544 /// X = ... 4545 /// Y = X+1 4546 /// use(Y) -> nonload/store 4547 /// Z = Y+1 4548 /// load Z 4549 /// 4550 /// In this case, Y has multiple uses, and can be folded into the load of Z 4551 /// (yielding load [X+2]). However, doing this will cause both "X" and "X+1" to 4552 /// be live at the use(Y) line. If we don't fold Y into load Z, we use one 4553 /// fewer register. Since Y can't be folded into "use(Y)" we don't increase the 4554 /// number of computations either. 4555 /// 4556 /// Note that this (like most of CodeGenPrepare) is just a rough heuristic. If 4557 /// X was live across 'load Z' for other reasons, we actually *would* want to 4558 /// fold the addressing mode in the Z case. This would make Y die earlier. 4559 bool AddressingModeMatcher:: 4560 isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, ExtAddrMode &AMBefore, 4561 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter) { 4562 if (IgnoreProfitability) return true; 4563 4564 // AMBefore is the addressing mode before this instruction was folded into it, 4565 // and AMAfter is the addressing mode after the instruction was folded. Get 4566 // the set of registers referenced by AMAfter and subtract out those 4567 // referenced by AMBefore: this is the set of values which folding in this 4568 // address extends the lifetime of. 4569 // 4570 // Note that there are only two potential values being referenced here, 4571 // BaseReg and ScaleReg (global addresses are always available, as are any 4572 // folded immediates). 4573 Value *BaseReg = AMAfter.BaseReg, *ScaledReg = AMAfter.ScaledReg; 4574 4575 // If the BaseReg or ScaledReg was referenced by the previous addrmode, their 4576 // lifetime wasn't extended by adding this instruction. 4577 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(BaseReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg)) 4578 BaseReg = nullptr; 4579 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(ScaledReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg)) 4580 ScaledReg = nullptr; 4581 4582 // If folding this instruction (and it's subexprs) didn't extend any live 4583 // ranges, we're ok with it. 4584 if (!BaseReg && !ScaledReg) 4585 return true; 4586 4587 // If all uses of this instruction can have the address mode sunk into them, 4588 // we can remove the addressing mode and effectively trade one live register 4589 // for another (at worst.) In this context, folding an addressing mode into 4590 // the use is just a particularly nice way of sinking it. 4591 SmallVector<std::pair<Instruction*,unsigned>, 16> MemoryUses; 4592 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 16> ConsideredInsts; 4593 if (FindAllMemoryUses(I, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI)) 4594 return false; // Has a non-memory, non-foldable use! 4595 4596 // Now that we know that all uses of this instruction are part of a chain of 4597 // computation involving only operations that could theoretically be folded 4598 // into a memory use, loop over each of these memory operation uses and see 4599 // if they could *actually* fold the instruction. The assumption is that 4600 // addressing modes are cheap and that duplicating the computation involved 4601 // many times is worthwhile, even on a fastpath. For sinking candidates 4602 // (i.e. cold call sites), this serves as a way to prevent excessive code 4603 // growth since most architectures have some reasonable small and fast way to 4604 // compute an effective address. (i.e LEA on x86) 4605 SmallVector<Instruction*, 32> MatchedAddrModeInsts; 4606 for (unsigned i = 0, e = MemoryUses.size(); i != e; ++i) { 4607 Instruction *User = MemoryUses[i].first; 4608 unsigned OpNo = MemoryUses[i].second; 4609 4610 // Get the access type of this use. If the use isn't a pointer, we don't 4611 // know what it accesses. 4612 Value *Address = User->getOperand(OpNo); 4613 PointerType *AddrTy = dyn_cast<PointerType>(Address->getType()); 4614 if (!AddrTy) 4615 return false; 4616 Type *AddressAccessTy = AddrTy->getElementType(); 4617 unsigned AS = AddrTy->getAddressSpace(); 4618 4619 // Do a match against the root of this address, ignoring profitability. This 4620 // will tell us if the addressing mode for the memory operation will 4621 // *actually* cover the shared instruction. 4622 ExtAddrMode Result; 4623 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> LargeOffsetGEP(nullptr, 4624 0); 4625 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4626 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4627 AddressingModeMatcher Matcher( 4628 MatchedAddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI, AddressAccessTy, AS, MemoryInst, Result, 4629 InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP); 4630 Matcher.IgnoreProfitability = true; 4631 bool Success = Matcher.matchAddr(Address, 0); 4632 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?"); 4633 4634 // The match was to check the profitability, the changes made are not 4635 // part of the original matcher. Therefore, they should be dropped 4636 // otherwise the original matcher will not present the right state. 4637 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4638 4639 // If the match didn't cover I, then it won't be shared by it. 4640 if (!is_contained(MatchedAddrModeInsts, I)) 4641 return false; 4642 4643 MatchedAddrModeInsts.clear(); 4644 } 4645 4646 return true; 4647 } 4648 4649 /// Return true if the specified values are defined in a 4650 /// different basic block than BB. 4651 static bool IsNonLocalValue(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB) { 4652 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) 4653 return I->getParent() != BB; 4654 return false; 4655 } 4656 4657 /// Sink addressing mode computation immediate before MemoryInst if doing so 4658 /// can be done without increasing register pressure. The need for the 4659 /// register pressure constraint means this can end up being an all or nothing 4660 /// decision for all uses of the same addressing computation. 4661 /// 4662 /// Load and Store Instructions often have addressing modes that can do 4663 /// significant amounts of computation. As such, instruction selection will try 4664 /// to get the load or store to do as much computation as possible for the 4665 /// program. The problem is that isel can only see within a single block. As 4666 /// such, we sink as much legal addressing mode work into the block as possible. 4667 /// 4668 /// This method is used to optimize both load/store and inline asms with memory 4669 /// operands. It's also used to sink addressing computations feeding into cold 4670 /// call sites into their (cold) basic block. 4671 /// 4672 /// The motivation for handling sinking into cold blocks is that doing so can 4673 /// both enable other address mode sinking (by satisfying the register pressure 4674 /// constraint above), and reduce register pressure globally (by removing the 4675 /// addressing mode computation from the fast path entirely.). 4676 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr, 4677 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace) { 4678 Value *Repl = Addr; 4679 4680 // Try to collapse single-value PHI nodes. This is necessary to undo 4681 // unprofitable PRE transformations. 4682 SmallVector<Value*, 8> worklist; 4683 SmallPtrSet<Value*, 16> Visited; 4684 worklist.push_back(Addr); 4685 4686 // Use a worklist to iteratively look through PHI and select nodes, and 4687 // ensure that the addressing mode obtained from the non-PHI/select roots of 4688 // the graph are compatible. 4689 bool PhiOrSelectSeen = false; 4690 SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> AddrModeInsts; 4691 const SimplifyQuery SQ(*DL, TLInfo); 4692 AddressingModeCombiner AddrModes(SQ, Addr); 4693 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts); 4694 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4695 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4696 while (!worklist.empty()) { 4697 Value *V = worklist.back(); 4698 worklist.pop_back(); 4699 4700 // We allow traversing cyclic Phi nodes. 4701 // In case of success after this loop we ensure that traversing through 4702 // Phi nodes ends up with all cases to compute address of the form 4703 // BaseGV + Base + Scale * Index + Offset 4704 // where Scale and Offset are constans and BaseGV, Base and Index 4705 // are exactly the same Values in all cases. 4706 // It means that BaseGV, Scale and Offset dominate our memory instruction 4707 // and have the same value as they had in address computation represented 4708 // as Phi. So we can safely sink address computation to memory instruction. 4709 if (!Visited.insert(V).second) 4710 continue; 4711 4712 // For a PHI node, push all of its incoming values. 4713 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V)) { 4714 for (Value *IncValue : P->incoming_values()) 4715 worklist.push_back(IncValue); 4716 PhiOrSelectSeen = true; 4717 continue; 4718 } 4719 // Similar for select. 4720 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) { 4721 worklist.push_back(SI->getFalseValue()); 4722 worklist.push_back(SI->getTrueValue()); 4723 PhiOrSelectSeen = true; 4724 continue; 4725 } 4726 4727 // For non-PHIs, determine the addressing mode being computed. Note that 4728 // the result may differ depending on what other uses our candidate 4729 // addressing instructions might have. 4730 AddrModeInsts.clear(); 4731 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> LargeOffsetGEP(nullptr, 4732 0); 4733 ExtAddrMode NewAddrMode = AddressingModeMatcher::Match( 4734 V, AccessTy, AddrSpace, MemoryInst, AddrModeInsts, *TLI, *TRI, 4735 InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP); 4736 4737 GetElementPtrInst *GEP = LargeOffsetGEP.first; 4738 if (GEP && GEP->getParent() != MemoryInst->getParent() && 4739 !NewGEPBases.count(GEP)) { 4740 // If splitting the underlying data structure can reduce the offset of a 4741 // GEP, collect the GEP. Skip the GEPs that are the new bases of 4742 // previously split data structures. 4743 LargeOffsetGEPMap[GEP->getPointerOperand()].push_back(LargeOffsetGEP); 4744 if (LargeOffsetGEPID.find(GEP) == LargeOffsetGEPID.end()) 4745 LargeOffsetGEPID[GEP] = LargeOffsetGEPID.size(); 4746 } 4747 4748 NewAddrMode.OriginalValue = V; 4749 if (!AddrModes.addNewAddrMode(NewAddrMode)) 4750 break; 4751 } 4752 4753 // Try to combine the AddrModes we've collected. If we couldn't collect any, 4754 // or we have multiple but either couldn't combine them or combining them 4755 // wouldn't do anything useful, bail out now. 4756 if (!AddrModes.combineAddrModes()) { 4757 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4758 return false; 4759 } 4760 TPT.commit(); 4761 4762 // Get the combined AddrMode (or the only AddrMode, if we only had one). 4763 ExtAddrMode AddrMode = AddrModes.getAddrMode(); 4764 4765 // If all the instructions matched are already in this BB, don't do anything. 4766 // If we saw a Phi node then it is not local definitely, and if we saw a select 4767 // then we want to push the address calculation past it even if it's already 4768 // in this BB. 4769 if (!PhiOrSelectSeen && none_of(AddrModeInsts, [&](Value *V) { 4770 return IsNonLocalValue(V, MemoryInst->getParent()); 4771 })) { 4772 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Found local addrmode: " << AddrMode 4773 << "\n"); 4774 return false; 4775 } 4776 4777 // Insert this computation right after this user. Since our caller is 4778 // scanning from the top of the BB to the bottom, reuse of the expr are 4779 // guaranteed to happen later. 4780 IRBuilder<> Builder(MemoryInst); 4781 4782 // Now that we determined the addressing expression we want to use and know 4783 // that we have to sink it into this block. Check to see if we have already 4784 // done this for some other load/store instr in this block. If so, reuse 4785 // the computation. Before attempting reuse, check if the address is valid 4786 // as it may have been erased. 4787 4788 WeakTrackingVH SunkAddrVH = SunkAddrs[Addr]; 4789 4790 Value * SunkAddr = SunkAddrVH.pointsToAliveValue() ? SunkAddrVH : nullptr; 4791 if (SunkAddr) { 4792 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Reusing nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode 4793 << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n"); 4794 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType()) 4795 SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType()); 4796 } else if (AddrSinkUsingGEPs || 4797 (!AddrSinkUsingGEPs.getNumOccurrences() && TM && TTI->useAA())) { 4798 // By default, we use the GEP-based method when AA is used later. This 4799 // prevents new inttoptr/ptrtoint pairs from degrading AA capabilities. 4800 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode 4801 << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n"); 4802 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType()); 4803 Value *ResultPtr = nullptr, *ResultIndex = nullptr; 4804 4805 // First, find the pointer. 4806 if (AddrMode.BaseReg && AddrMode.BaseReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) { 4807 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseReg; 4808 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr; 4809 } 4810 4811 if (AddrMode.Scale && AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) { 4812 // We can't add more than one pointer together, nor can we scale a 4813 // pointer (both of which seem meaningless). 4814 if (ResultPtr || AddrMode.Scale != 1) 4815 return false; 4816 4817 ResultPtr = AddrMode.ScaledReg; 4818 AddrMode.Scale = 0; 4819 } 4820 4821 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math 4822 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since 4823 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when 4824 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths 4825 // do not match instead of extending it. 4826 // 4827 // (See below for code to add the scale.) 4828 if (AddrMode.Scale) { 4829 Type *ScaledRegTy = AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType(); 4830 if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() > 4831 cast<IntegerType>(ScaledRegTy)->getBitWidth()) 4832 return false; 4833 } 4834 4835 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) { 4836 if (ResultPtr) 4837 return false; 4838 4839 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseGV; 4840 } 4841 4842 // If the real base value actually came from an inttoptr, then the matcher 4843 // will look through it and provide only the integer value. In that case, 4844 // use it here. 4845 if (!DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(Addr->getType())) { 4846 if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.BaseReg) { 4847 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.BaseReg, Addr->getType(), 4848 "sunkaddr"); 4849 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr; 4850 } else if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.Scale == 1) { 4851 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.ScaledReg, Addr->getType(), 4852 "sunkaddr"); 4853 AddrMode.Scale = 0; 4854 } 4855 } 4856 4857 if (!ResultPtr && 4858 !AddrMode.BaseReg && !AddrMode.Scale && !AddrMode.BaseOffs) { 4859 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType()); 4860 } else if (!ResultPtr) { 4861 return false; 4862 } else { 4863 Type *I8PtrTy = 4864 Builder.getInt8PtrTy(Addr->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace()); 4865 Type *I8Ty = Builder.getInt8Ty(); 4866 4867 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address 4868 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it 4869 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be 4870 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then 4871 // we'd end up sinking both muls. 4872 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) { 4873 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg; 4874 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy) 4875 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr"); 4876 4877 ResultIndex = V; 4878 } 4879 4880 // Add the scale value. 4881 if (AddrMode.Scale) { 4882 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg; 4883 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) { 4884 // done. 4885 } else { 4886 assert(cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() < 4887 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth() && 4888 "We can't transform if ScaledReg is too narrow"); 4889 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4890 } 4891 4892 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1) 4893 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale), 4894 "sunkaddr"); 4895 if (ResultIndex) 4896 ResultIndex = Builder.CreateAdd(ResultIndex, V, "sunkaddr"); 4897 else 4898 ResultIndex = V; 4899 } 4900 4901 // Add in the Base Offset if present. 4902 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) { 4903 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs); 4904 if (ResultIndex) { 4905 // We need to add this separately from the scale above to help with 4906 // SDAG consecutive load/store merging. 4907 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy) 4908 ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy); 4909 ResultPtr = 4910 AddrMode.InBounds 4911 ? Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, 4912 "sunkaddr") 4913 : Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr"); 4914 } 4915 4916 ResultIndex = V; 4917 } 4918 4919 if (!ResultIndex) { 4920 SunkAddr = ResultPtr; 4921 } else { 4922 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy) 4923 ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy); 4924 SunkAddr = 4925 AddrMode.InBounds 4926 ? Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, 4927 "sunkaddr") 4928 : Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr"); 4929 } 4930 4931 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType()) 4932 SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType()); 4933 } 4934 } else { 4935 // We'd require a ptrtoint/inttoptr down the line, which we can't do for 4936 // non-integral pointers, so in that case bail out now. 4937 Type *BaseTy = AddrMode.BaseReg ? AddrMode.BaseReg->getType() : nullptr; 4938 Type *ScaleTy = AddrMode.Scale ? AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType() : nullptr; 4939 PointerType *BasePtrTy = dyn_cast_or_null<PointerType>(BaseTy); 4940 PointerType *ScalePtrTy = dyn_cast_or_null<PointerType>(ScaleTy); 4941 if (DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(Addr->getType()) || 4942 (BasePtrTy && DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(BasePtrTy)) || 4943 (ScalePtrTy && DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(ScalePtrTy)) || 4944 (AddrMode.BaseGV && 4945 DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(AddrMode.BaseGV->getType()))) 4946 return false; 4947 4948 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode 4949 << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n"); 4950 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType()); 4951 Value *Result = nullptr; 4952 4953 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address 4954 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it 4955 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be 4956 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then 4957 // we'd end up sinking both muls. 4958 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) { 4959 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg; 4960 if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) 4961 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4962 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy) 4963 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr"); 4964 Result = V; 4965 } 4966 4967 // Add the scale value. 4968 if (AddrMode.Scale) { 4969 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg; 4970 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) { 4971 // done. 4972 } else if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) { 4973 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4974 } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() < 4975 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) { 4976 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4977 } else { 4978 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math 4979 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since 4980 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when 4981 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths 4982 // do not match instead of extending it. 4983 Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(Result); 4984 if (I && (Result != AddrMode.BaseReg)) 4985 I->eraseFromParent(); 4986 return false; 4987 } 4988 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1) 4989 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale), 4990 "sunkaddr"); 4991 if (Result) 4992 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr"); 4993 else 4994 Result = V; 4995 } 4996 4997 // Add in the BaseGV if present. 4998 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) { 4999 Value *V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(AddrMode.BaseGV, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 5000 if (Result) 5001 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr"); 5002 else 5003 Result = V; 5004 } 5005 5006 // Add in the Base Offset if present. 5007 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) { 5008 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs); 5009 if (Result) 5010 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr"); 5011 else 5012 Result = V; 5013 } 5014 5015 if (!Result) 5016 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType()); 5017 else 5018 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(Result, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr"); 5019 } 5020 5021 MemoryInst->replaceUsesOfWith(Repl, SunkAddr); 5022 // Store the newly computed address into the cache. In the case we reused a 5023 // value, this should be idempotent. 5024 SunkAddrs[Addr] = WeakTrackingVH(SunkAddr); 5025 5026 // If we have no uses, recursively delete the value and all dead instructions 5027 // using it. 5028 if (Repl->use_empty()) { 5029 // This can cause recursive deletion, which can invalidate our iterator. 5030 // Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case this happens. 5031 Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator; 5032 WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue); 5033 BasicBlock *BB = CurInstIterator->getParent(); 5034 5035 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Repl, TLInfo); 5036 5037 if (IterHandle != CurValue) { 5038 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the 5039 // start of the block. 5040 CurInstIterator = BB->begin(); 5041 SunkAddrs.clear(); 5042 } 5043 } 5044 ++NumMemoryInsts; 5045 return true; 5046 } 5047 5048 /// If there are any memory operands, use OptimizeMemoryInst to sink their 5049 /// address computing into the block when possible / profitable. 5050 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS) { 5051 bool MadeChange = false; 5052 5053 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI = 5054 TM->getSubtargetImpl(*CS->getFunction())->getRegisterInfo(); 5055 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints = 5056 TLI->ParseConstraints(*DL, TRI, CS); 5057 unsigned ArgNo = 0; 5058 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) { 5059 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i]; 5060 5061 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use. 5062 TLI->ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue()); 5063 5064 if (OpInfo.ConstraintType == TargetLowering::C_Memory && 5065 OpInfo.isIndirect) { 5066 Value *OpVal = CS->getArgOperand(ArgNo++); 5067 MadeChange |= optimizeMemoryInst(CS, OpVal, OpVal->getType(), ~0u); 5068 } else if (OpInfo.Type == InlineAsm::isInput) 5069 ArgNo++; 5070 } 5071 5072 return MadeChange; 5073 } 5074 5075 /// Check if all the uses of \p Val are equivalent (or free) zero or 5076 /// sign extensions. 5077 static bool hasSameExtUse(Value *Val, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 5078 assert(!Val->use_empty() && "Input must have at least one use"); 5079 const Instruction *FirstUser = cast<Instruction>(*Val->user_begin()); 5080 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(FirstUser); 5081 Type *ExtTy = FirstUser->getType(); 5082 for (const User *U : Val->users()) { 5083 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 5084 if ((IsSExt && !isa<SExtInst>(UI)) || (!IsSExt && !isa<ZExtInst>(UI))) 5085 return false; 5086 Type *CurTy = UI->getType(); 5087 // Same input and output types: Same instruction after CSE. 5088 if (CurTy == ExtTy) 5089 continue; 5090 5091 // If IsSExt is true, we are in this situation: 5092 // a = Val 5093 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2 5094 // c = sext ty1 a to ty3 5095 // Assuming ty2 is shorter than ty3, this could be turned into: 5096 // a = Val 5097 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2 5098 // c = sext ty2 b to ty3 5099 // However, the last sext is not free. 5100 if (IsSExt) 5101 return false; 5102 5103 // This is a ZExt, maybe this is free to extend from one type to another. 5104 // In that case, we would not account for a different use. 5105 Type *NarrowTy; 5106 Type *LargeTy; 5107 if (ExtTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth() > 5108 CurTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth()) { 5109 NarrowTy = CurTy; 5110 LargeTy = ExtTy; 5111 } else { 5112 NarrowTy = ExtTy; 5113 LargeTy = CurTy; 5114 } 5115 5116 if (!TLI.isZExtFree(NarrowTy, LargeTy)) 5117 return false; 5118 } 5119 // All uses are the same or can be derived from one another for free. 5120 return true; 5121 } 5122 5123 /// Try to speculatively promote extensions in \p Exts and continue 5124 /// promoting through newly promoted operands recursively as far as doing so is 5125 /// profitable. Save extensions profitably moved up, in \p ProfitablyMovedExts. 5126 /// When some promotion happened, \p TPT contains the proper state to revert 5127 /// them. 5128 /// 5129 /// \return true if some promotion happened, false otherwise. 5130 bool CodeGenPrepare::tryToPromoteExts( 5131 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts, 5132 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts, 5133 unsigned CreatedInstsCost) { 5134 bool Promoted = false; 5135 5136 // Iterate over all the extensions to try to promote them. 5137 for (auto I : Exts) { 5138 // Early check if we directly have ext(load). 5139 if (isa<LoadInst>(I->getOperand(0))) { 5140 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 5141 continue; 5142 } 5143 5144 // Check whether or not we want to do any promotion. The reason we have 5145 // this check inside the for loop is to catch the case where an extension 5146 // is directly fed by a load because in such case the extension can be moved 5147 // up without any promotion on its operands. 5148 if (!TLI || !TLI->enableExtLdPromotion() || DisableExtLdPromotion) 5149 return false; 5150 5151 // Get the action to perform the promotion. 5152 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH = 5153 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(I, InsertedInsts, *TLI, PromotedInsts); 5154 // Check if we can promote. 5155 if (!TPH) { 5156 // Save the current extension as we cannot move up through its operand. 5157 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 5158 continue; 5159 } 5160 5161 // Save the current state. 5162 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 5163 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 5164 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> NewExts; 5165 unsigned NewCreatedInstsCost = 0; 5166 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI->isExtFree(I); 5167 // Promote. 5168 Value *PromotedVal = TPH(I, TPT, PromotedInsts, NewCreatedInstsCost, 5169 &NewExts, nullptr, *TLI); 5170 assert(PromotedVal && 5171 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases"); 5172 5173 // We would be able to merge only one extension in a load. 5174 // Therefore, if we have more than 1 new extension we heuristically 5175 // cut this search path, because it means we degrade the code quality. 5176 // With exactly 2, the transformation is neutral, because we will merge 5177 // one extension but leave one. However, we optimistically keep going, 5178 // because the new extension may be removed too. 5179 long long TotalCreatedInstsCost = CreatedInstsCost + NewCreatedInstsCost; 5180 // FIXME: It would be possible to propagate a negative value instead of 5181 // conservatively ceiling it to 0. 5182 TotalCreatedInstsCost = 5183 std::max((long long)0, (TotalCreatedInstsCost - ExtCost)); 5184 if (!StressExtLdPromotion && 5185 (TotalCreatedInstsCost > 1 || 5186 !isPromotedInstructionLegal(*TLI, *DL, PromotedVal))) { 5187 // This promotion is not profitable, rollback to the previous state, and 5188 // save the current extension in ProfitablyMovedExts as the latest 5189 // speculative promotion turned out to be unprofitable. 5190 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 5191 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 5192 continue; 5193 } 5194 // Continue promoting NewExts as far as doing so is profitable. 5195 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> NewlyMovedExts; 5196 (void)tryToPromoteExts(TPT, NewExts, NewlyMovedExts, TotalCreatedInstsCost); 5197 bool NewPromoted = false; 5198 for (auto ExtInst : NewlyMovedExts) { 5199 Instruction *MovedExt = cast<Instruction>(ExtInst); 5200 Value *ExtOperand = MovedExt->getOperand(0); 5201 // If we have reached to a load, we need this extra profitability check 5202 // as it could potentially be merged into an ext(load). 5203 if (isa<LoadInst>(ExtOperand) && 5204 !(StressExtLdPromotion || NewCreatedInstsCost <= ExtCost || 5205 (ExtOperand->hasOneUse() || hasSameExtUse(ExtOperand, *TLI)))) 5206 continue; 5207 5208 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(MovedExt); 5209 NewPromoted = true; 5210 } 5211 5212 // If none of speculative promotions for NewExts is profitable, rollback 5213 // and save the current extension (I) as the last profitable extension. 5214 if (!NewPromoted) { 5215 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 5216 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 5217 continue; 5218 } 5219 // The promotion is profitable. 5220 Promoted = true; 5221 } 5222 return Promoted; 5223 } 5224 5225 /// Merging redundant sexts when one is dominating the other. 5226 bool CodeGenPrepare::mergeSExts(Function &F, DominatorTree &DT) { 5227 bool Changed = false; 5228 for (auto &Entry : ValToSExtendedUses) { 5229 SExts &Insts = Entry.second; 5230 SExts CurPts; 5231 for (Instruction *Inst : Insts) { 5232 if (RemovedInsts.count(Inst) || !isa<SExtInst>(Inst) || 5233 Inst->getOperand(0) != Entry.first) 5234 continue; 5235 bool inserted = false; 5236 for (auto &Pt : CurPts) { 5237 if (DT.dominates(Inst, Pt)) { 5238 Pt->replaceAllUsesWith(Inst); 5239 RemovedInsts.insert(Pt); 5240 Pt->removeFromParent(); 5241 Pt = Inst; 5242 inserted = true; 5243 Changed = true; 5244 break; 5245 } 5246 if (!DT.dominates(Pt, Inst)) 5247 // Give up if we need to merge in a common dominator as the 5248 // experiments show it is not profitable. 5249 continue; 5250 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(Pt); 5251 RemovedInsts.insert(Inst); 5252 Inst->removeFromParent(); 5253 inserted = true; 5254 Changed = true; 5255 break; 5256 } 5257 if (!inserted) 5258 CurPts.push_back(Inst); 5259 } 5260 } 5261 return Changed; 5262 } 5263 5264 // Spliting large data structures so that the GEPs accessing them can have 5265 // smaller offsets so that they can be sunk to the same blocks as their users. 5266 // For example, a large struct starting from %base is splitted into two parts 5267 // where the second part starts from %new_base. 5268 // 5269 // Before: 5270 // BB0: 5271 // %base = 5272 // 5273 // BB1: 5274 // %gep0 = gep %base, off0 5275 // %gep1 = gep %base, off1 5276 // %gep2 = gep %base, off2 5277 // 5278 // BB2: 5279 // %load1 = load %gep0 5280 // %load2 = load %gep1 5281 // %load3 = load %gep2 5282 // 5283 // After: 5284 // BB0: 5285 // %base = 5286 // %new_base = gep %base, off0 5287 // 5288 // BB1: 5289 // %new_gep0 = %new_base 5290 // %new_gep1 = gep %new_base, off1 - off0 5291 // %new_gep2 = gep %new_base, off2 - off0 5292 // 5293 // BB2: 5294 // %load1 = load i32, i32* %new_gep0 5295 // %load2 = load i32, i32* %new_gep1 5296 // %load3 = load i32, i32* %new_gep2 5297 // 5298 // %new_gep1 and %new_gep2 can be sunk to BB2 now after the splitting because 5299 // their offsets are smaller enough to fit into the addressing mode. 5300 bool CodeGenPrepare::splitLargeGEPOffsets() { 5301 bool Changed = false; 5302 for (auto &Entry : LargeOffsetGEPMap) { 5303 Value *OldBase = Entry.first; 5304 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t>> 5305 &LargeOffsetGEPs = Entry.second; 5306 auto compareGEPOffset = 5307 [&](const std::pair<GetElementPtrInst *, int64_t> &LHS, 5308 const std::pair<GetElementPtrInst *, int64_t> &RHS) { 5309 if (LHS.first == RHS.first) 5310 return false; 5311 if (LHS.second != RHS.second) 5312 return LHS.second < RHS.second; 5313 return LargeOffsetGEPID[LHS.first] < LargeOffsetGEPID[RHS.first]; 5314 }; 5315 // Sorting all the GEPs of the same data structures based on the offsets. 5316 llvm::sort(LargeOffsetGEPs, compareGEPOffset); 5317 LargeOffsetGEPs.erase( 5318 std::unique(LargeOffsetGEPs.begin(), LargeOffsetGEPs.end()), 5319 LargeOffsetGEPs.end()); 5320 // Skip if all the GEPs have the same offsets. 5321 if (LargeOffsetGEPs.front().second == LargeOffsetGEPs.back().second) 5322 continue; 5323 GetElementPtrInst *BaseGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin()->first; 5324 int64_t BaseOffset = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin()->second; 5325 Value *NewBaseGEP = nullptr; 5326 5327 auto LargeOffsetGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin(); 5328 while (LargeOffsetGEP != LargeOffsetGEPs.end()) { 5329 GetElementPtrInst *GEP = LargeOffsetGEP->first; 5330 int64_t Offset = LargeOffsetGEP->second; 5331 if (Offset != BaseOffset) { 5332 TargetLowering::AddrMode AddrMode; 5333 AddrMode.BaseOffs = Offset - BaseOffset; 5334 // The result type of the GEP might not be the type of the memory 5335 // access. 5336 if (!TLI->isLegalAddressingMode(*DL, AddrMode, 5337 GEP->getResultElementType(), 5338 GEP->getAddressSpace())) { 5339 // We need to create a new base if the offset to the current base is 5340 // too large to fit into the addressing mode. So, a very large struct 5341 // may be splitted into several parts. 5342 BaseGEP = GEP; 5343 BaseOffset = Offset; 5344 NewBaseGEP = nullptr; 5345 } 5346 } 5347 5348 // Generate a new GEP to replace the current one. 5349 LLVMContext &Ctx = GEP->getContext(); 5350 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(GEP->getType()); 5351 Type *I8PtrTy = 5352 Type::getInt8PtrTy(Ctx, GEP->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace()); 5353 Type *I8Ty = Type::getInt8Ty(Ctx); 5354 5355 if (!NewBaseGEP) { 5356 // Create a new base if we don't have one yet. Find the insertion 5357 // pointer for the new base first. 5358 BasicBlock::iterator NewBaseInsertPt; 5359 BasicBlock *NewBaseInsertBB; 5360 if (auto *BaseI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OldBase)) { 5361 // If the base of the struct is an instruction, the new base will be 5362 // inserted close to it. 5363 NewBaseInsertBB = BaseI->getParent(); 5364 if (isa<PHINode>(BaseI)) 5365 NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5366 else if (InvokeInst *Invoke = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(BaseI)) { 5367 NewBaseInsertBB = 5368 SplitEdge(NewBaseInsertBB, Invoke->getNormalDest()); 5369 NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5370 } else 5371 NewBaseInsertPt = std::next(BaseI->getIterator()); 5372 } else { 5373 // If the current base is an argument or global value, the new base 5374 // will be inserted to the entry block. 5375 NewBaseInsertBB = &BaseGEP->getFunction()->getEntryBlock(); 5376 NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5377 } 5378 IRBuilder<> NewBaseBuilder(NewBaseInsertBB, NewBaseInsertPt); 5379 // Create a new base. 5380 Value *BaseIndex = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, BaseOffset); 5381 NewBaseGEP = OldBase; 5382 if (NewBaseGEP->getType() != I8PtrTy) 5383 NewBaseGEP = NewBaseBuilder.CreatePointerCast(NewBaseGEP, I8PtrTy); 5384 NewBaseGEP = 5385 NewBaseBuilder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, NewBaseGEP, BaseIndex, "splitgep"); 5386 NewGEPBases.insert(NewBaseGEP); 5387 } 5388 5389 IRBuilder<> Builder(GEP); 5390 Value *NewGEP = NewBaseGEP; 5391 if (Offset == BaseOffset) { 5392 if (GEP->getType() != I8PtrTy) 5393 NewGEP = Builder.CreatePointerCast(NewGEP, GEP->getType()); 5394 } else { 5395 // Calculate the new offset for the new GEP. 5396 Value *Index = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, Offset - BaseOffset); 5397 NewGEP = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, NewBaseGEP, Index); 5398 5399 if (GEP->getType() != I8PtrTy) 5400 NewGEP = Builder.CreatePointerCast(NewGEP, GEP->getType()); 5401 } 5402 GEP->replaceAllUsesWith(NewGEP); 5403 LargeOffsetGEPID.erase(GEP); 5404 LargeOffsetGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.erase(LargeOffsetGEP); 5405 GEP->eraseFromParent(); 5406 Changed = true; 5407 } 5408 } 5409 return Changed; 5410 } 5411 5412 /// Return true, if an ext(load) can be formed from an extension in 5413 /// \p MovedExts. 5414 bool CodeGenPrepare::canFormExtLd( 5415 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts, LoadInst *&LI, 5416 Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted) { 5417 for (auto *MovedExtInst : MovedExts) { 5418 if (isa<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0))) { 5419 LI = cast<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0)); 5420 Inst = MovedExtInst; 5421 break; 5422 } 5423 } 5424 if (!LI) 5425 return false; 5426 5427 // If they're already in the same block, there's nothing to do. 5428 // Make the cheap checks first if we did not promote. 5429 // If we promoted, we need to check if it is indeed profitable. 5430 if (!HasPromoted && LI->getParent() == Inst->getParent()) 5431 return false; 5432 5433 return TLI->isExtLoad(LI, Inst, *DL); 5434 } 5435 5436 /// Move a zext or sext fed by a load into the same basic block as the load, 5437 /// unless conditions are unfavorable. This allows SelectionDAG to fold the 5438 /// extend into the load. 5439 /// 5440 /// E.g., 5441 /// \code 5442 /// %ld = load i32* %addr 5443 /// %add = add nuw i32 %ld, 4 5444 /// %zext = zext i32 %add to i64 5445 // \endcode 5446 /// => 5447 /// \code 5448 /// %ld = load i32* %addr 5449 /// %zext = zext i32 %ld to i64 5450 /// %add = add nuw i64 %zext, 4 5451 /// \encode 5452 /// Note that the promotion in %add to i64 is done in tryToPromoteExts(), which 5453 /// allow us to match zext(load i32*) to i64. 5454 /// 5455 /// Also, try to promote the computations used to obtain a sign extended 5456 /// value used into memory accesses. 5457 /// E.g., 5458 /// \code 5459 /// a = add nsw i32 b, 3 5460 /// d = sext i32 a to i64 5461 /// e = getelementptr ..., i64 d 5462 /// \endcode 5463 /// => 5464 /// \code 5465 /// f = sext i32 b to i64 5466 /// a = add nsw i64 f, 3 5467 /// e = getelementptr ..., i64 a 5468 /// \endcode 5469 /// 5470 /// \p Inst[in/out] the extension may be modified during the process if some 5471 /// promotions apply. 5472 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExt(Instruction *&Inst) { 5473 // ExtLoad formation and address type promotion infrastructure requires TLI to 5474 // be effective. 5475 if (!TLI) 5476 return false; 5477 5478 bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader = false; 5479 /// See if it is an interesting sext operations for the address type 5480 /// promotion before trying to promote it, e.g., the ones with the right 5481 /// type and used in memory accesses. 5482 bool ATPConsiderable = TTI->shouldConsiderAddressTypePromotion( 5483 *Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader); 5484 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts); 5485 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 5486 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 5487 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts; 5488 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> SpeculativelyMovedExts; 5489 Exts.push_back(Inst); 5490 5491 bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, SpeculativelyMovedExts); 5492 5493 // Look for a load being extended. 5494 LoadInst *LI = nullptr; 5495 Instruction *ExtFedByLoad; 5496 5497 // Try to promote a chain of computation if it allows to form an extended 5498 // load. 5499 if (canFormExtLd(SpeculativelyMovedExts, LI, ExtFedByLoad, HasPromoted)) { 5500 assert(LI && ExtFedByLoad && "Expect a valid load and extension"); 5501 TPT.commit(); 5502 // Move the extend into the same block as the load 5503 ExtFedByLoad->moveAfter(LI); 5504 // CGP does not check if the zext would be speculatively executed when moved 5505 // to the same basic block as the load. Preserving its original location 5506 // would pessimize the debugging experience, as well as negatively impact 5507 // the quality of sample pgo. We don't want to use "line 0" as that has a 5508 // size cost in the line-table section and logically the zext can be seen as 5509 // part of the load. Therefore we conservatively reuse the same debug 5510 // location for the load and the zext. 5511 ExtFedByLoad->setDebugLoc(LI->getDebugLoc()); 5512 ++NumExtsMoved; 5513 Inst = ExtFedByLoad; 5514 return true; 5515 } 5516 5517 // Continue promoting SExts if known as considerable depending on targets. 5518 if (ATPConsiderable && 5519 performAddressTypePromotion(Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader, 5520 HasPromoted, TPT, SpeculativelyMovedExts)) 5521 return true; 5522 5523 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 5524 return false; 5525 } 5526 5527 // Perform address type promotion if doing so is profitable. 5528 // If AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == false, we should find other sext 5529 // instructions that sign extended the same initial value. However, if 5530 // AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == true, we expect promoting the 5531 // extension is just profitable. 5532 bool CodeGenPrepare::performAddressTypePromotion( 5533 Instruction *&Inst, bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader, 5534 bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 5535 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5536 bool Promoted = false; 5537 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 1> UnhandledExts; 5538 bool AllSeenFirst = true; 5539 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5540 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5541 DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *>::iterator AlreadySeen = 5542 SeenChainsForSExt.find(HeadOfChain); 5543 // If there is an unhandled SExt which has the same header, try to promote 5544 // it as well. 5545 if (AlreadySeen != SeenChainsForSExt.end()) { 5546 if (AlreadySeen->second != nullptr) 5547 UnhandledExts.insert(AlreadySeen->second); 5548 AllSeenFirst = false; 5549 } 5550 } 5551 5552 if (!AllSeenFirst || (AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader && 5553 SpeculativelyMovedExts.size() == 1)) { 5554 TPT.commit(); 5555 if (HasPromoted) 5556 Promoted = true; 5557 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5558 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5559 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr; 5560 ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I); 5561 } 5562 // Update Inst as promotion happen. 5563 Inst = SpeculativelyMovedExts.pop_back_val(); 5564 } else { 5565 // This is the first chain visited from the header, keep the current chain 5566 // as unhandled. Defer to promote this until we encounter another SExt 5567 // chain derived from the same header. 5568 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5569 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5570 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = Inst; 5571 } 5572 return false; 5573 } 5574 5575 if (!AllSeenFirst && !UnhandledExts.empty()) 5576 for (auto VisitedSExt : UnhandledExts) { 5577 if (RemovedInsts.count(VisitedSExt)) 5578 continue; 5579 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts); 5580 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts; 5581 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Chains; 5582 Exts.push_back(VisitedSExt); 5583 bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, Chains); 5584 TPT.commit(); 5585 if (HasPromoted) 5586 Promoted = true; 5587 for (auto I : Chains) { 5588 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5589 // Mark this as handled. 5590 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr; 5591 ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I); 5592 } 5593 } 5594 return Promoted; 5595 } 5596 5597 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I) { 5598 BasicBlock *DefBB = I->getParent(); 5599 5600 // If the result of a {s|z}ext and its source are both live out, rewrite all 5601 // other uses of the source with result of extension. 5602 Value *Src = I->getOperand(0); 5603 if (Src->hasOneUse()) 5604 return false; 5605 5606 // Only do this xform if truncating is free. 5607 if (TLI && !TLI->isTruncateFree(I->getType(), Src->getType())) 5608 return false; 5609 5610 // Only safe to perform the optimization if the source is also defined in 5611 // this block. 5612 if (!isa<Instruction>(Src) || DefBB != cast<Instruction>(Src)->getParent()) 5613 return false; 5614 5615 bool DefIsLiveOut = false; 5616 for (User *U : I->users()) { 5617 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 5618 5619 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in. 5620 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent(); 5621 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 5622 DefIsLiveOut = true; 5623 break; 5624 } 5625 if (!DefIsLiveOut) 5626 return false; 5627 5628 // Make sure none of the uses are PHI nodes. 5629 for (User *U : Src->users()) { 5630 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 5631 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent(); 5632 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 5633 // Be conservative. We don't want this xform to end up introducing 5634 // reloads just before load / store instructions. 5635 if (isa<PHINode>(UI) || isa<LoadInst>(UI) || isa<StoreInst>(UI)) 5636 return false; 5637 } 5638 5639 // InsertedTruncs - Only insert one trunc in each block once. 5640 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedTruncs; 5641 5642 bool MadeChange = false; 5643 for (Use &U : Src->uses()) { 5644 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser()); 5645 5646 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in. 5647 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 5648 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 5649 5650 // Both src and def are live in this block. Rewrite the use. 5651 Instruction *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[UserBB]; 5652 5653 if (!InsertedTrunc) { 5654 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5655 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 5656 InsertedTrunc = new TruncInst(I, Src->getType(), "", &*InsertPt); 5657 InsertedInsts.insert(InsertedTrunc); 5658 } 5659 5660 // Replace a use of the {s|z}ext source with a use of the result. 5661 U = InsertedTrunc; 5662 ++NumExtUses; 5663 MadeChange = true; 5664 } 5665 5666 return MadeChange; 5667 } 5668 5669 // Find loads whose uses only use some of the loaded value's bits. Add an "and" 5670 // just after the load if the target can fold this into one extload instruction, 5671 // with the hope of eliminating some of the other later "and" instructions using 5672 // the loaded value. "and"s that are made trivially redundant by the insertion 5673 // of the new "and" are removed by this function, while others (e.g. those whose 5674 // path from the load goes through a phi) are left for isel to potentially 5675 // remove. 5676 // 5677 // For example: 5678 // 5679 // b0: 5680 // x = load i32 5681 // ... 5682 // b1: 5683 // y = and x, 0xff 5684 // z = use y 5685 // 5686 // becomes: 5687 // 5688 // b0: 5689 // x = load i32 5690 // x' = and x, 0xff 5691 // ... 5692 // b1: 5693 // z = use x' 5694 // 5695 // whereas: 5696 // 5697 // b0: 5698 // x1 = load i32 5699 // ... 5700 // b1: 5701 // x2 = load i32 5702 // ... 5703 // b2: 5704 // x = phi x1, x2 5705 // y = and x, 0xff 5706 // 5707 // becomes (after a call to optimizeLoadExt for each load): 5708 // 5709 // b0: 5710 // x1 = load i32 5711 // x1' = and x1, 0xff 5712 // ... 5713 // b1: 5714 // x2 = load i32 5715 // x2' = and x2, 0xff 5716 // ... 5717 // b2: 5718 // x = phi x1', x2' 5719 // y = and x, 0xff 5720 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *Load) { 5721 if (!Load->isSimple() || !Load->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy()) 5722 return false; 5723 5724 // Skip loads we've already transformed. 5725 if (Load->hasOneUse() && 5726 InsertedInsts.count(cast<Instruction>(*Load->user_begin()))) 5727 return false; 5728 5729 // Look at all uses of Load, looking through phis, to determine how many bits 5730 // of the loaded value are needed. 5731 SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> WorkList; 5732 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16> Visited; 5733 SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> AndsToMaybeRemove; 5734 for (auto *U : Load->users()) 5735 WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U)); 5736 5737 EVT LoadResultVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, Load->getType()); 5738 unsigned BitWidth = LoadResultVT.getSizeInBits(); 5739 APInt DemandBits(BitWidth, 0); 5740 APInt WidestAndBits(BitWidth, 0); 5741 5742 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 5743 Instruction *I = WorkList.back(); 5744 WorkList.pop_back(); 5745 5746 // Break use-def graph loops. 5747 if (!Visited.insert(I).second) 5748 continue; 5749 5750 // For a PHI node, push all of its users. 5751 if (auto *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) { 5752 for (auto *U : Phi->users()) 5753 WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U)); 5754 continue; 5755 } 5756 5757 switch (I->getOpcode()) { 5758 case Instruction::And: { 5759 auto *AndC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1)); 5760 if (!AndC) 5761 return false; 5762 APInt AndBits = AndC->getValue(); 5763 DemandBits |= AndBits; 5764 // Keep track of the widest and mask we see. 5765 if (AndBits.ugt(WidestAndBits)) 5766 WidestAndBits = AndBits; 5767 if (AndBits == WidestAndBits && I->getOperand(0) == Load) 5768 AndsToMaybeRemove.push_back(I); 5769 break; 5770 } 5771 5772 case Instruction::Shl: { 5773 auto *ShlC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1)); 5774 if (!ShlC) 5775 return false; 5776 uint64_t ShiftAmt = ShlC->getLimitedValue(BitWidth - 1); 5777 DemandBits.setLowBits(BitWidth - ShiftAmt); 5778 break; 5779 } 5780 5781 case Instruction::Trunc: { 5782 EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, I->getType()); 5783 unsigned TruncBitWidth = TruncVT.getSizeInBits(); 5784 DemandBits.setLowBits(TruncBitWidth); 5785 break; 5786 } 5787 5788 default: 5789 return false; 5790 } 5791 } 5792 5793 uint32_t ActiveBits = DemandBits.getActiveBits(); 5794 // Avoid hoisting (and (load x) 1) since it is unlikely to be folded by the 5795 // target even if isLoadExtLegal says an i1 EXTLOAD is valid. For example, 5796 // for the AArch64 target isLoadExtLegal(ZEXTLOAD, i32, i1) returns true, but 5797 // (and (load x) 1) is not matched as a single instruction, rather as a LDR 5798 // followed by an AND. 5799 // TODO: Look into removing this restriction by fixing backends to either 5800 // return false for isLoadExtLegal for i1 or have them select this pattern to 5801 // a single instruction. 5802 // 5803 // Also avoid hoisting if we didn't see any ands with the exact DemandBits 5804 // mask, since these are the only ands that will be removed by isel. 5805 if (ActiveBits <= 1 || !DemandBits.isMask(ActiveBits) || 5806 WidestAndBits != DemandBits) 5807 return false; 5808 5809 LLVMContext &Ctx = Load->getType()->getContext(); 5810 Type *TruncTy = Type::getIntNTy(Ctx, ActiveBits); 5811 EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, TruncTy); 5812 5813 // Reject cases that won't be matched as extloads. 5814 if (!LoadResultVT.bitsGT(TruncVT) || !TruncVT.isRound() || 5815 !TLI->isLoadExtLegal(ISD::ZEXTLOAD, LoadResultVT, TruncVT)) 5816 return false; 5817 5818 IRBuilder<> Builder(Load->getNextNode()); 5819 auto *NewAnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>( 5820 Builder.CreateAnd(Load, ConstantInt::get(Ctx, DemandBits))); 5821 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other 5822 // optimizations don't touch it. 5823 InsertedInsts.insert(NewAnd); 5824 5825 // Replace all uses of load with new and (except for the use of load in the 5826 // new and itself). 5827 Load->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd); 5828 NewAnd->setOperand(0, Load); 5829 5830 // Remove any and instructions that are now redundant. 5831 for (auto *And : AndsToMaybeRemove) 5832 // Check that the and mask is the same as the one we decided to put on the 5833 // new and. 5834 if (cast<ConstantInt>(And->getOperand(1))->getValue() == DemandBits) { 5835 And->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd); 5836 if (&*CurInstIterator == And) 5837 CurInstIterator = std::next(And->getIterator()); 5838 And->eraseFromParent(); 5839 ++NumAndUses; 5840 } 5841 5842 ++NumAndsAdded; 5843 return true; 5844 } 5845 5846 /// Check if V (an operand of a select instruction) is an expensive instruction 5847 /// that is only used once. 5848 static bool sinkSelectOperand(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI, Value *V) { 5849 auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V); 5850 // If it's safe to speculatively execute, then it should not have side 5851 // effects; therefore, it's safe to sink and possibly *not* execute. 5852 return I && I->hasOneUse() && isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) && 5853 TTI->getUserCost(I) >= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Expensive; 5854 } 5855 5856 /// Returns true if a SelectInst should be turned into an explicit branch. 5857 static bool isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI, 5858 const TargetLowering *TLI, 5859 SelectInst *SI) { 5860 // If even a predictable select is cheap, then a branch can't be cheaper. 5861 if (!TLI->isPredictableSelectExpensive()) 5862 return false; 5863 5864 // FIXME: This should use the same heuristics as IfConversion to determine 5865 // whether a select is better represented as a branch. 5866 5867 // If metadata tells us that the select condition is obviously predictable, 5868 // then we want to replace the select with a branch. 5869 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight; 5870 if (SI->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) { 5871 uint64_t Max = std::max(TrueWeight, FalseWeight); 5872 uint64_t Sum = TrueWeight + FalseWeight; 5873 if (Sum != 0) { 5874 auto Probability = BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(Max, Sum); 5875 if (Probability > TLI->getPredictableBranchThreshold()) 5876 return true; 5877 } 5878 } 5879 5880 CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI->getCondition()); 5881 5882 // If a branch is predictable, an out-of-order CPU can avoid blocking on its 5883 // comparison condition. If the compare has more than one use, there's 5884 // probably another cmov or setcc around, so it's not worth emitting a branch. 5885 if (!Cmp || !Cmp->hasOneUse()) 5886 return false; 5887 5888 // If either operand of the select is expensive and only needed on one side 5889 // of the select, we should form a branch. 5890 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue()) || 5891 sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue())) 5892 return true; 5893 5894 return false; 5895 } 5896 5897 /// If \p isTrue is true, return the true value of \p SI, otherwise return 5898 /// false value of \p SI. If the true/false value of \p SI is defined by any 5899 /// select instructions in \p Selects, look through the defining select 5900 /// instruction until the true/false value is not defined in \p Selects. 5901 static Value *getTrueOrFalseValue( 5902 SelectInst *SI, bool isTrue, 5903 const SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> &Selects) { 5904 Value *V; 5905 5906 for (SelectInst *DefSI = SI; DefSI != nullptr && Selects.count(DefSI); 5907 DefSI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) { 5908 assert(DefSI->getCondition() == SI->getCondition() && 5909 "The condition of DefSI does not match with SI"); 5910 V = (isTrue ? DefSI->getTrueValue() : DefSI->getFalseValue()); 5911 } 5912 return V; 5913 } 5914 5915 /// If we have a SelectInst that will likely profit from branch prediction, 5916 /// turn it into a branch. 5917 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI, bool &ModifiedDT) { 5918 // If branch conversion isn't desirable, exit early. 5919 if (DisableSelectToBranch || OptSize || !TLI) 5920 return false; 5921 5922 // Find all consecutive select instructions that share the same condition. 5923 SmallVector<SelectInst *, 2> ASI; 5924 ASI.push_back(SI); 5925 for (BasicBlock::iterator It = ++BasicBlock::iterator(SI); 5926 It != SI->getParent()->end(); ++It) { 5927 SelectInst *I = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(&*It); 5928 if (I && SI->getCondition() == I->getCondition()) { 5929 ASI.push_back(I); 5930 } else { 5931 break; 5932 } 5933 } 5934 5935 SelectInst *LastSI = ASI.back(); 5936 // Increment the current iterator to skip all the rest of select instructions 5937 // because they will be either "not lowered" or "all lowered" to branch. 5938 CurInstIterator = std::next(LastSI->getIterator()); 5939 5940 bool VectorCond = !SI->getCondition()->getType()->isIntegerTy(1); 5941 5942 // Can we convert the 'select' to CF ? 5943 if (VectorCond || SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable)) 5944 return false; 5945 5946 TargetLowering::SelectSupportKind SelectKind; 5947 if (VectorCond) 5948 SelectKind = TargetLowering::VectorMaskSelect; 5949 else if (SI->getType()->isVectorTy()) 5950 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarCondVectorVal; 5951 else 5952 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarValSelect; 5953 5954 if (TLI->isSelectSupported(SelectKind) && 5955 !isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(TTI, TLI, SI)) 5956 return false; 5957 5958 ModifiedDT = true; 5959 5960 // Transform a sequence like this: 5961 // start: 5962 // %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b 5963 // %sel = select i1 %cmp, i32 %c, i32 %d 5964 // 5965 // Into: 5966 // start: 5967 // %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b 5968 // br i1 %cmp, label %select.true, label %select.false 5969 // select.true: 5970 // br label %select.end 5971 // select.false: 5972 // br label %select.end 5973 // select.end: 5974 // %sel = phi i32 [ %c, %select.true ], [ %d, %select.false ] 5975 // 5976 // In addition, we may sink instructions that produce %c or %d from 5977 // the entry block into the destination(s) of the new branch. 5978 // If the true or false blocks do not contain a sunken instruction, that 5979 // block and its branch may be optimized away. In that case, one side of the 5980 // first branch will point directly to select.end, and the corresponding PHI 5981 // predecessor block will be the start block. 5982 5983 // First, we split the block containing the select into 2 blocks. 5984 BasicBlock *StartBlock = SI->getParent(); 5985 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(LastSI)); 5986 BasicBlock *EndBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "select.end"); 5987 5988 // Delete the unconditional branch that was just created by the split. 5989 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent(); 5990 5991 // These are the new basic blocks for the conditional branch. 5992 // At least one will become an actual new basic block. 5993 BasicBlock *TrueBlock = nullptr; 5994 BasicBlock *FalseBlock = nullptr; 5995 BranchInst *TrueBranch = nullptr; 5996 BranchInst *FalseBranch = nullptr; 5997 5998 // Sink expensive instructions into the conditional blocks to avoid executing 5999 // them speculatively. 6000 for (SelectInst *SI : ASI) { 6001 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue())) { 6002 if (TrueBlock == nullptr) { 6003 TrueBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.true.sink", 6004 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock); 6005 TrueBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, TrueBlock); 6006 TrueBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 6007 } 6008 auto *TrueInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getTrueValue()); 6009 TrueInst->moveBefore(TrueBranch); 6010 } 6011 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue())) { 6012 if (FalseBlock == nullptr) { 6013 FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false.sink", 6014 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock); 6015 FalseBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock); 6016 FalseBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 6017 } 6018 auto *FalseInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getFalseValue()); 6019 FalseInst->moveBefore(FalseBranch); 6020 } 6021 } 6022 6023 // If there was nothing to sink, then arbitrarily choose the 'false' side 6024 // for a new input value to the PHI. 6025 if (TrueBlock == FalseBlock) { 6026 assert(TrueBlock == nullptr && 6027 "Unexpected basic block transform while optimizing select"); 6028 6029 FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false", 6030 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock); 6031 auto *FalseBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock); 6032 FalseBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 6033 } 6034 6035 // Insert the real conditional branch based on the original condition. 6036 // If we did not create a new block for one of the 'true' or 'false' paths 6037 // of the condition, it means that side of the branch goes to the end block 6038 // directly and the path originates from the start block from the point of 6039 // view of the new PHI. 6040 BasicBlock *TT, *FT; 6041 if (TrueBlock == nullptr) { 6042 TT = EndBlock; 6043 FT = FalseBlock; 6044 TrueBlock = StartBlock; 6045 } else if (FalseBlock == nullptr) { 6046 TT = TrueBlock; 6047 FT = EndBlock; 6048 FalseBlock = StartBlock; 6049 } else { 6050 TT = TrueBlock; 6051 FT = FalseBlock; 6052 } 6053 IRBuilder<>(SI).CreateCondBr(SI->getCondition(), TT, FT, SI); 6054 6055 SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> INS; 6056 INS.insert(ASI.begin(), ASI.end()); 6057 // Use reverse iterator because later select may use the value of the 6058 // earlier select, and we need to propagate value through earlier select 6059 // to get the PHI operand. 6060 for (auto It = ASI.rbegin(); It != ASI.rend(); ++It) { 6061 SelectInst *SI = *It; 6062 // The select itself is replaced with a PHI Node. 6063 PHINode *PN = PHINode::Create(SI->getType(), 2, "", &EndBlock->front()); 6064 PN->takeName(SI); 6065 PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, true, INS), TrueBlock); 6066 PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, false, INS), FalseBlock); 6067 PN->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 6068 6069 SI->replaceAllUsesWith(PN); 6070 SI->eraseFromParent(); 6071 INS.erase(SI); 6072 ++NumSelectsExpanded; 6073 } 6074 6075 // Instruct OptimizeBlock to skip to the next block. 6076 CurInstIterator = StartBlock->end(); 6077 return true; 6078 } 6079 6080 static bool isBroadcastShuffle(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) { 6081 SmallVector<int, 16> Mask(SVI->getShuffleMask()); 6082 int SplatElem = -1; 6083 for (unsigned i = 0; i < Mask.size(); ++i) { 6084 if (SplatElem != -1 && Mask[i] != -1 && Mask[i] != SplatElem) 6085 return false; 6086 SplatElem = Mask[i]; 6087 } 6088 6089 return true; 6090 } 6091 6092 /// Some targets have expensive vector shifts if the lanes aren't all the same 6093 /// (e.g. x86 only introduced "vpsllvd" and friends with AVX2). In these cases 6094 /// it's often worth sinking a shufflevector splat down to its use so that 6095 /// codegen can spot all lanes are identical. 6096 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) { 6097 BasicBlock *DefBB = SVI->getParent(); 6098 6099 // Only do this xform if variable vector shifts are particularly expensive. 6100 if (!TLI || !TLI->isVectorShiftByScalarCheap(SVI->getType())) 6101 return false; 6102 6103 // We only expect better codegen by sinking a shuffle if we can recognise a 6104 // constant splat. 6105 if (!isBroadcastShuffle(SVI)) 6106 return false; 6107 6108 // InsertedShuffles - Only insert a shuffle in each block once. 6109 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedShuffles; 6110 6111 bool MadeChange = false; 6112 for (User *U : SVI->users()) { 6113 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 6114 6115 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in. 6116 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent(); 6117 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 6118 6119 // For now only apply this when the splat is used by a shift instruction. 6120 if (!UI->isShift()) continue; 6121 6122 // Everything checks out, sink the shuffle if the user's block doesn't 6123 // already have a copy. 6124 Instruction *&InsertedShuffle = InsertedShuffles[UserBB]; 6125 6126 if (!InsertedShuffle) { 6127 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 6128 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 6129 InsertedShuffle = 6130 new ShuffleVectorInst(SVI->getOperand(0), SVI->getOperand(1), 6131 SVI->getOperand(2), "", &*InsertPt); 6132 } 6133 6134 UI->replaceUsesOfWith(SVI, InsertedShuffle); 6135 MadeChange = true; 6136 } 6137 6138 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shuffle. 6139 if (SVI->use_empty()) { 6140 SVI->eraseFromParent(); 6141 MadeChange = true; 6142 } 6143 6144 return MadeChange; 6145 } 6146 6147 bool CodeGenPrepare::tryToSinkFreeOperands(Instruction *I) { 6148 // If the operands of I can be folded into a target instruction together with 6149 // I, duplicate and sink them. 6150 SmallVector<Use *, 4> OpsToSink; 6151 if (!TLI || !TLI->shouldSinkOperands(I, OpsToSink)) 6152 return false; 6153 6154 // OpsToSink can contain multiple uses in a use chain (e.g. 6155 // (%u1 with %u1 = shufflevector), (%u2 with %u2 = zext %u1)). The dominating 6156 // uses must come first, which means they are sunk first, temporarily creating 6157 // invalid IR. This will be fixed once their dominated users are sunk and 6158 // updated. 6159 BasicBlock *TargetBB = I->getParent(); 6160 bool Changed = false; 6161 SmallVector<Use *, 4> ToReplace; 6162 for (Use *U : OpsToSink) { 6163 auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(U->get()); 6164 if (UI->getParent() == TargetBB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) 6165 continue; 6166 ToReplace.push_back(U); 6167 } 6168 6169 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> MaybeDead; 6170 for (Use *U : ToReplace) { 6171 auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(U->get()); 6172 Instruction *NI = UI->clone(); 6173 MaybeDead.insert(UI); 6174 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Sinking " << *UI << " to user " << *I << "\n"); 6175 NI->insertBefore(I); 6176 InsertedInsts.insert(NI); 6177 U->set(NI); 6178 Changed = true; 6179 } 6180 6181 // Remove instructions that are dead after sinking. 6182 for (auto *I : MaybeDead) 6183 if (!I->hasNUsesOrMore(1)) 6184 I->eraseFromParent(); 6185 6186 return Changed; 6187 } 6188 6189 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *SI) { 6190 if (!TLI || !DL) 6191 return false; 6192 6193 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition(); 6194 Type *OldType = Cond->getType(); 6195 LLVMContext &Context = Cond->getContext(); 6196 MVT RegType = TLI->getRegisterType(Context, TLI->getValueType(*DL, OldType)); 6197 unsigned RegWidth = RegType.getSizeInBits(); 6198 6199 if (RegWidth <= cast<IntegerType>(OldType)->getBitWidth()) 6200 return false; 6201 6202 // If the register width is greater than the type width, expand the condition 6203 // of the switch instruction and each case constant to the width of the 6204 // register. By widening the type of the switch condition, subsequent 6205 // comparisons (for case comparisons) will not need to be extended to the 6206 // preferred register width, so we will potentially eliminate N-1 extends, 6207 // where N is the number of cases in the switch. 6208 auto *NewType = Type::getIntNTy(Context, RegWidth); 6209 6210 // Zero-extend the switch condition and case constants unless the switch 6211 // condition is a function argument that is already being sign-extended. 6212 // In that case, we can avoid an unnecessary mask/extension by sign-extending 6213 // everything instead. 6214 Instruction::CastOps ExtType = Instruction::ZExt; 6215 if (auto *Arg = dyn_cast<Argument>(Cond)) 6216 if (Arg->hasSExtAttr()) 6217 ExtType = Instruction::SExt; 6218 6219 auto *ExtInst = CastInst::Create(ExtType, Cond, NewType); 6220 ExtInst->insertBefore(SI); 6221 ExtInst->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 6222 SI->setCondition(ExtInst); 6223 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) { 6224 APInt NarrowConst = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue(); 6225 APInt WideConst = (ExtType == Instruction::ZExt) ? 6226 NarrowConst.zext(RegWidth) : NarrowConst.sext(RegWidth); 6227 Case.setValue(ConstantInt::get(Context, WideConst)); 6228 } 6229 6230 return true; 6231 } 6232 6233 6234 namespace { 6235 6236 /// Helper class to promote a scalar operation to a vector one. 6237 /// This class is used to move downward extractelement transition. 6238 /// E.g., 6239 /// a = vector_op <2 x i32> 6240 /// b = extractelement <2 x i32> a, i32 0 6241 /// c = scalar_op b 6242 /// store c 6243 /// 6244 /// => 6245 /// a = vector_op <2 x i32> 6246 /// c = vector_op a (equivalent to scalar_op on the related lane) 6247 /// * d = extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0 6248 /// * store d 6249 /// Assuming both extractelement and store can be combine, we get rid of the 6250 /// transition. 6251 class VectorPromoteHelper { 6252 /// DataLayout associated with the current module. 6253 const DataLayout &DL; 6254 6255 /// Used to perform some checks on the legality of vector operations. 6256 const TargetLowering &TLI; 6257 6258 /// Used to estimated the cost of the promoted chain. 6259 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI; 6260 6261 /// The transition being moved downwards. 6262 Instruction *Transition; 6263 6264 /// The sequence of instructions to be promoted. 6265 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> InstsToBePromoted; 6266 6267 /// Cost of combining a store and an extract. 6268 unsigned StoreExtractCombineCost; 6269 6270 /// Instruction that will be combined with the transition. 6271 Instruction *CombineInst = nullptr; 6272 6273 /// The instruction that represents the current end of the transition. 6274 /// Since we are faking the promotion until we reach the end of the chain 6275 /// of computation, we need a way to get the current end of the transition. 6276 Instruction *getEndOfTransition() const { 6277 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty()) 6278 return Transition; 6279 return InstsToBePromoted.back(); 6280 } 6281 6282 /// Return the index of the original value in the transition. 6283 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the original value, 6284 /// c, is at index 0. 6285 unsigned getTransitionOriginalValueIdx() const { 6286 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) && 6287 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet"); 6288 return 0; 6289 } 6290 6291 /// Return the index of the index in the transition. 6292 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0" the index 6293 /// is at index 1. 6294 unsigned getTransitionIdx() const { 6295 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) && 6296 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet"); 6297 return 1; 6298 } 6299 6300 /// Get the type of the transition. 6301 /// This is the type of the original value. 6302 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the type of the 6303 /// transition is <2 x i32>. 6304 Type *getTransitionType() const { 6305 return Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx())->getType(); 6306 } 6307 6308 /// Promote \p ToBePromoted by moving \p Def downward through. 6309 /// I.e., we have the following sequence: 6310 /// Def = Transition <ty1> a to <ty2> 6311 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty2> Def, ... 6312 /// => 6313 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty1> a, ... 6314 /// Def = Transition <ty1> ToBePromoted to <ty2> 6315 void promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted); 6316 6317 /// Check whether or not it is profitable to promote all the 6318 /// instructions enqueued to be promoted. 6319 bool isProfitableToPromote() { 6320 Value *ValIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx()); 6321 unsigned Index = isa<ConstantInt>(ValIdx) 6322 ? cast<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)->getZExtValue() 6323 : -1; 6324 Type *PromotedType = getTransitionType(); 6325 6326 StoreInst *ST = cast<StoreInst>(CombineInst); 6327 unsigned AS = ST->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6328 unsigned Align = ST->getAlignment(); 6329 // Check if this store is supported. 6330 if (!TLI.allowsMisalignedMemoryAccesses( 6331 TLI.getValueType(DL, ST->getValueOperand()->getType()), AS, 6332 Align)) { 6333 // If this is not supported, there is no way we can combine 6334 // the extract with the store. 6335 return false; 6336 } 6337 6338 // The scalar chain of computation has to pay for the transition 6339 // scalar to vector. 6340 // The vector chain has to account for the combining cost. 6341 uint64_t ScalarCost = 6342 TTI.getVectorInstrCost(Transition->getOpcode(), PromotedType, Index); 6343 uint64_t VectorCost = StoreExtractCombineCost; 6344 for (const auto &Inst : InstsToBePromoted) { 6345 // Compute the cost. 6346 // By construction, all instructions being promoted are arithmetic ones. 6347 // Moreover, one argument is a constant that can be viewed as a splat 6348 // constant. 6349 Value *Arg0 = Inst->getOperand(0); 6350 bool IsArg0Constant = isa<UndefValue>(Arg0) || isa<ConstantInt>(Arg0) || 6351 isa<ConstantFP>(Arg0); 6352 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg0OVK = 6353 IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue 6354 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue; 6355 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg1OVK = 6356 !IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue 6357 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue; 6358 ScalarCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost( 6359 Inst->getOpcode(), Inst->getType(), Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK); 6360 VectorCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(Inst->getOpcode(), PromotedType, 6361 Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK); 6362 } 6363 LLVM_DEBUG( 6364 dbgs() << "Estimated cost of computation to be promoted:\nScalar: " 6365 << ScalarCost << "\nVector: " << VectorCost << '\n'); 6366 return ScalarCost > VectorCost; 6367 } 6368 6369 /// Generate a constant vector with \p Val with the same 6370 /// number of elements as the transition. 6371 /// \p UseSplat defines whether or not \p Val should be replicated 6372 /// across the whole vector. 6373 /// In other words, if UseSplat == true, we generate <Val, Val, ..., Val>, 6374 /// otherwise we generate a vector with as many undef as possible: 6375 /// <undef, ..., undef, Val, undef, ..., undef> where \p Val is only 6376 /// used at the index of the extract. 6377 Value *getConstantVector(Constant *Val, bool UseSplat) const { 6378 unsigned ExtractIdx = std::numeric_limits<unsigned>::max(); 6379 if (!UseSplat) { 6380 // If we cannot determine where the constant must be, we have to 6381 // use a splat constant. 6382 Value *ValExtractIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionIdx()); 6383 if (ConstantInt *CstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ValExtractIdx)) 6384 ExtractIdx = CstVal->getSExtValue(); 6385 else 6386 UseSplat = true; 6387 } 6388 6389 unsigned End = getTransitionType()->getVectorNumElements(); 6390 if (UseSplat) 6391 return ConstantVector::getSplat(End, Val); 6392 6393 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> ConstVec; 6394 UndefValue *UndefVal = UndefValue::get(Val->getType()); 6395 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx != End; ++Idx) { 6396 if (Idx == ExtractIdx) 6397 ConstVec.push_back(Val); 6398 else 6399 ConstVec.push_back(UndefVal); 6400 } 6401 return ConstantVector::get(ConstVec); 6402 } 6403 6404 /// Check if promoting to a vector type an operand at \p OperandIdx 6405 /// in \p Use can trigger undefined behavior. 6406 static bool canCauseUndefinedBehavior(const Instruction *Use, 6407 unsigned OperandIdx) { 6408 // This is not safe to introduce undef when the operand is on 6409 // the right hand side of a division-like instruction. 6410 if (OperandIdx != 1) 6411 return false; 6412 switch (Use->getOpcode()) { 6413 default: 6414 return false; 6415 case Instruction::SDiv: 6416 case Instruction::UDiv: 6417 case Instruction::SRem: 6418 case Instruction::URem: 6419 return true; 6420 case Instruction::FDiv: 6421 case Instruction::FRem: 6422 return !Use->hasNoNaNs(); 6423 } 6424 llvm_unreachable(nullptr); 6425 } 6426 6427 public: 6428 VectorPromoteHelper(const DataLayout &DL, const TargetLowering &TLI, 6429 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, Instruction *Transition, 6430 unsigned CombineCost) 6431 : DL(DL), TLI(TLI), TTI(TTI), Transition(Transition), 6432 StoreExtractCombineCost(CombineCost) { 6433 assert(Transition && "Do not know how to promote null"); 6434 } 6435 6436 /// Check if we can promote \p ToBePromoted to \p Type. 6437 bool canPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const { 6438 // We could support CastInst too. 6439 return isa<BinaryOperator>(ToBePromoted); 6440 } 6441 6442 /// Check if it is profitable to promote \p ToBePromoted 6443 /// by moving downward the transition through. 6444 bool shouldPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const { 6445 // Promote only if all the operands can be statically expanded. 6446 // Indeed, we do not want to introduce any new kind of transitions. 6447 for (const Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) { 6448 const Value *Val = U.get(); 6449 if (Val == getEndOfTransition()) { 6450 // If the use is a division and the transition is on the rhs, 6451 // we cannot promote the operation, otherwise we may create a 6452 // division by zero. 6453 if (canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo())) 6454 return false; 6455 continue; 6456 } 6457 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(Val) && !isa<UndefValue>(Val) && 6458 !isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) 6459 return false; 6460 } 6461 // Check that the resulting operation is legal. 6462 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(ToBePromoted->getOpcode()); 6463 if (!ISDOpcode) 6464 return false; 6465 return StressStoreExtract || 6466 TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom( 6467 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, getTransitionType(), true)); 6468 } 6469 6470 /// Check whether or not \p Use can be combined 6471 /// with the transition. 6472 /// I.e., is it possible to do Use(Transition) => AnotherUse? 6473 bool canCombine(const Instruction *Use) { return isa<StoreInst>(Use); } 6474 6475 /// Record \p ToBePromoted as part of the chain to be promoted. 6476 void enqueueForPromotion(Instruction *ToBePromoted) { 6477 InstsToBePromoted.push_back(ToBePromoted); 6478 } 6479 6480 /// Set the instruction that will be combined with the transition. 6481 void recordCombineInstruction(Instruction *ToBeCombined) { 6482 assert(canCombine(ToBeCombined) && "Unsupported instruction to combine"); 6483 CombineInst = ToBeCombined; 6484 } 6485 6486 /// Promote all the instructions enqueued for promotion if it is 6487 /// is profitable. 6488 /// \return True if the promotion happened, false otherwise. 6489 bool promote() { 6490 // Check if there is something to promote. 6491 // Right now, if we do not have anything to combine with, 6492 // we assume the promotion is not profitable. 6493 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty() || !CombineInst) 6494 return false; 6495 6496 // Check cost. 6497 if (!StressStoreExtract && !isProfitableToPromote()) 6498 return false; 6499 6500 // Promote. 6501 for (auto &ToBePromoted : InstsToBePromoted) 6502 promoteImpl(ToBePromoted); 6503 InstsToBePromoted.clear(); 6504 return true; 6505 } 6506 }; 6507 6508 } // end anonymous namespace 6509 6510 void VectorPromoteHelper::promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted) { 6511 // At this point, we know that all the operands of ToBePromoted but Def 6512 // can be statically promoted. 6513 // For Def, we need to use its parameter in ToBePromoted: 6514 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 a 6515 // Def = Transition ty1 b to ty2 6516 // Move the transition down. 6517 // 1. Replace all uses of the promoted operation by the transition. 6518 // = ... b => = ... Def. 6519 assert(ToBePromoted->getType() == Transition->getType() && 6520 "The type of the result of the transition does not match " 6521 "the final type"); 6522 ToBePromoted->replaceAllUsesWith(Transition); 6523 // 2. Update the type of the uses. 6524 // b = ToBePromoted ty2 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def. 6525 Type *TransitionTy = getTransitionType(); 6526 ToBePromoted->mutateType(TransitionTy); 6527 // 3. Update all the operands of the promoted operation with promoted 6528 // operands. 6529 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 a. 6530 for (Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) { 6531 Value *Val = U.get(); 6532 Value *NewVal = nullptr; 6533 if (Val == Transition) 6534 NewVal = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx()); 6535 else if (isa<UndefValue>(Val) || isa<ConstantInt>(Val) || 6536 isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) { 6537 // Use a splat constant if it is not safe to use undef. 6538 NewVal = getConstantVector( 6539 cast<Constant>(Val), 6540 isa<UndefValue>(Val) || 6541 canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo())); 6542 } else 6543 llvm_unreachable("Did you modified shouldPromote and forgot to update " 6544 "this?"); 6545 ToBePromoted->setOperand(U.getOperandNo(), NewVal); 6546 } 6547 Transition->moveAfter(ToBePromoted); 6548 Transition->setOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx(), ToBePromoted); 6549 } 6550 6551 /// Some targets can do store(extractelement) with one instruction. 6552 /// Try to push the extractelement towards the stores when the target 6553 /// has this feature and this is profitable. 6554 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst) { 6555 unsigned CombineCost = std::numeric_limits<unsigned>::max(); 6556 if (DisableStoreExtract || !TLI || 6557 (!StressStoreExtract && 6558 !TLI->canCombineStoreAndExtract(Inst->getOperand(0)->getType(), 6559 Inst->getOperand(1), CombineCost))) 6560 return false; 6561 6562 // At this point we know that Inst is a vector to scalar transition. 6563 // Try to move it down the def-use chain, until: 6564 // - We can combine the transition with its single use 6565 // => we got rid of the transition. 6566 // - We escape the current basic block 6567 // => we would need to check that we are moving it at a cheaper place and 6568 // we do not do that for now. 6569 BasicBlock *Parent = Inst->getParent(); 6570 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Found an interesting transition: " << *Inst << '\n'); 6571 VectorPromoteHelper VPH(*DL, *TLI, *TTI, Inst, CombineCost); 6572 // If the transition has more than one use, assume this is not going to be 6573 // beneficial. 6574 while (Inst->hasOneUse()) { 6575 Instruction *ToBePromoted = cast<Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin()); 6576 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Use: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n'); 6577 6578 if (ToBePromoted->getParent() != Parent) { 6579 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Instruction to promote is in a different block (" 6580 << ToBePromoted->getParent()->getName() 6581 << ") than the transition (" << Parent->getName() 6582 << ").\n"); 6583 return false; 6584 } 6585 6586 if (VPH.canCombine(ToBePromoted)) { 6587 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assume " << *Inst << '\n' 6588 << "will be combined with: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n'); 6589 VPH.recordCombineInstruction(ToBePromoted); 6590 bool Changed = VPH.promote(); 6591 NumStoreExtractExposed += Changed; 6592 return Changed; 6593 } 6594 6595 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Try promoting.\n"); 6596 if (!VPH.canPromote(ToBePromoted) || !VPH.shouldPromote(ToBePromoted)) 6597 return false; 6598 6599 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Promoting is possible... Enqueue for promotion!\n"); 6600 6601 VPH.enqueueForPromotion(ToBePromoted); 6602 Inst = ToBePromoted; 6603 } 6604 return false; 6605 } 6606 6607 /// For the instruction sequence of store below, F and I values 6608 /// are bundled together as an i64 value before being stored into memory. 6609 /// Sometimes it is more efficient to generate separate stores for F and I, 6610 /// which can remove the bitwise instructions or sink them to colder places. 6611 /// 6612 /// (store (or (zext (bitcast F to i32) to i64), 6613 /// (shl (zext I to i64), 32)), addr) --> 6614 /// (store F, addr) and (store I, addr+4) 6615 /// 6616 /// Similarly, splitting for other merged store can also be beneficial, like: 6617 /// For pair of {i32, i32}, i64 store --> two i32 stores. 6618 /// For pair of {i32, i16}, i64 store --> two i32 stores. 6619 /// For pair of {i16, i16}, i32 store --> two i16 stores. 6620 /// For pair of {i16, i8}, i32 store --> two i16 stores. 6621 /// For pair of {i8, i8}, i16 store --> two i8 stores. 6622 /// 6623 /// We allow each target to determine specifically which kind of splitting is 6624 /// supported. 6625 /// 6626 /// The store patterns are commonly seen from the simple code snippet below 6627 /// if only std::make_pair(...) is sroa transformed before inlined into hoo. 6628 /// void goo(const std::pair<int, float> &); 6629 /// hoo() { 6630 /// ... 6631 /// goo(std::make_pair(tmp, ftmp)); 6632 /// ... 6633 /// } 6634 /// 6635 /// Although we already have similar splitting in DAG Combine, we duplicate 6636 /// it in CodeGenPrepare to catch the case in which pattern is across 6637 /// multiple BBs. The logic in DAG Combine is kept to catch case generated 6638 /// during code expansion. 6639 static bool splitMergedValStore(StoreInst &SI, const DataLayout &DL, 6640 const TargetLowering &TLI) { 6641 // Handle simple but common cases only. 6642 Type *StoreType = SI.getValueOperand()->getType(); 6643 if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(StoreType) != DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) || 6644 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) == 0) 6645 return false; 6646 6647 unsigned HalfValBitSize = DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) / 2; 6648 Type *SplitStoreType = Type::getIntNTy(SI.getContext(), HalfValBitSize); 6649 if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(SplitStoreType) != 6650 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(SplitStoreType)) 6651 return false; 6652 6653 // Match the following patterns: 6654 // (store (or (zext LValue to i64), 6655 // (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize) 6656 // or 6657 // (store (or (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize) 6658 // (zext LValue to i64), 6659 // Expect both operands of OR and the first operand of SHL have only 6660 // one use. 6661 Value *LValue, *HValue; 6662 if (!match(SI.getValueOperand(), 6663 m_c_Or(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(LValue))), 6664 m_OneUse(m_Shl(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(HValue))), 6665 m_SpecificInt(HalfValBitSize)))))) 6666 return false; 6667 6668 // Check LValue and HValue are int with size less or equal than 32. 6669 if (!LValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() || 6670 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(LValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize || 6671 !HValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() || 6672 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(HValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize) 6673 return false; 6674 6675 // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast instruction, use the EVT before bitcast 6676 // as the input of target query. 6677 auto *LBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(LValue); 6678 auto *HBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(HValue); 6679 EVT LowTy = LBC ? EVT::getEVT(LBC->getOperand(0)->getType()) 6680 : EVT::getEVT(LValue->getType()); 6681 EVT HighTy = HBC ? EVT::getEVT(HBC->getOperand(0)->getType()) 6682 : EVT::getEVT(HValue->getType()); 6683 if (!ForceSplitStore && !TLI.isMultiStoresCheaperThanBitsMerge(LowTy, HighTy)) 6684 return false; 6685 6686 // Start to split store. 6687 IRBuilder<> Builder(SI.getContext()); 6688 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&SI); 6689 6690 // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast in another BB, create a new one in current 6691 // BB so it may be merged with the splitted stores by dag combiner. 6692 if (LBC && LBC->getParent() != SI.getParent()) 6693 LValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(LBC->getOperand(0), LBC->getType()); 6694 if (HBC && HBC->getParent() != SI.getParent()) 6695 HValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(HBC->getOperand(0), HBC->getType()); 6696 6697 bool IsLE = SI.getModule()->getDataLayout().isLittleEndian(); 6698 auto CreateSplitStore = [&](Value *V, bool Upper) { 6699 V = Builder.CreateZExtOrBitCast(V, SplitStoreType); 6700 Value *Addr = Builder.CreateBitCast( 6701 SI.getOperand(1), 6702 SplitStoreType->getPointerTo(SI.getPointerAddressSpace())); 6703 if ((IsLE && Upper) || (!IsLE && !Upper)) 6704 Addr = Builder.CreateGEP( 6705 SplitStoreType, Addr, 6706 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(SI.getContext()), 1)); 6707 Builder.CreateAlignedStore( 6708 V, Addr, Upper ? SI.getAlignment() / 2 : SI.getAlignment()); 6709 }; 6710 6711 CreateSplitStore(LValue, false); 6712 CreateSplitStore(HValue, true); 6713 6714 // Delete the old store. 6715 SI.eraseFromParent(); 6716 return true; 6717 } 6718 6719 // Return true if the GEP has two operands, the first operand is of a sequential 6720 // type, and the second operand is a constant. 6721 static bool GEPSequentialConstIndexed(GetElementPtrInst *GEP) { 6722 gep_type_iterator I = gep_type_begin(*GEP); 6723 return GEP->getNumOperands() == 2 && 6724 I.isSequential() && 6725 isa<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(1)); 6726 } 6727 6728 // Try unmerging GEPs to reduce liveness interference (register pressure) across 6729 // IndirectBr edges. Since IndirectBr edges tend to touch on many blocks, 6730 // reducing liveness interference across those edges benefits global register 6731 // allocation. Currently handles only certain cases. 6732 // 6733 // For example, unmerge %GEPI and %UGEPI as below. 6734 // 6735 // ---------- BEFORE ---------- 6736 // SrcBlock: 6737 // ... 6738 // %GEPIOp = ... 6739 // ... 6740 // %GEPI = gep %GEPIOp, Idx 6741 // ... 6742 // indirectbr ... [ label %DstB0, label %DstB1, ... label %DstBi ... ] 6743 // (* %GEPI is alive on the indirectbr edges due to other uses ahead) 6744 // (* %GEPIOp is alive on the indirectbr edges only because of it's used by 6745 // %UGEPI) 6746 // 6747 // DstB0: ... (there may be a gep similar to %UGEPI to be unmerged) 6748 // DstB1: ... (there may be a gep similar to %UGEPI to be unmerged) 6749 // ... 6750 // 6751 // DstBi: 6752 // ... 6753 // %UGEPI = gep %GEPIOp, UIdx 6754 // ... 6755 // --------------------------- 6756 // 6757 // ---------- AFTER ---------- 6758 // SrcBlock: 6759 // ... (same as above) 6760 // (* %GEPI is still alive on the indirectbr edges) 6761 // (* %GEPIOp is no longer alive on the indirectbr edges as a result of the 6762 // unmerging) 6763 // ... 6764 // 6765 // DstBi: 6766 // ... 6767 // %UGEPI = gep %GEPI, (UIdx-Idx) 6768 // ... 6769 // --------------------------- 6770 // 6771 // The register pressure on the IndirectBr edges is reduced because %GEPIOp is 6772 // no longer alive on them. 6773 // 6774 // We try to unmerge GEPs here in CodGenPrepare, as opposed to limiting merging 6775 // of GEPs in the first place in InstCombiner::visitGetElementPtrInst() so as 6776 // not to disable further simplications and optimizations as a result of GEP 6777 // merging. 6778 // 6779 // Note this unmerging may increase the length of the data flow critical path 6780 // (the path from %GEPIOp to %UGEPI would go through %GEPI), which is a tradeoff 6781 // between the register pressure and the length of data-flow critical 6782 // path. Restricting this to the uncommon IndirectBr case would minimize the 6783 // impact of potentially longer critical path, if any, and the impact on compile 6784 // time. 6785 static bool tryUnmergingGEPsAcrossIndirectBr(GetElementPtrInst *GEPI, 6786 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) { 6787 BasicBlock *SrcBlock = GEPI->getParent(); 6788 // Check that SrcBlock ends with an IndirectBr. If not, give up. The common 6789 // (non-IndirectBr) cases exit early here. 6790 if (!isa<IndirectBrInst>(SrcBlock->getTerminator())) 6791 return false; 6792 // Check that GEPI is a simple gep with a single constant index. 6793 if (!GEPSequentialConstIndexed(GEPI)) 6794 return false; 6795 ConstantInt *GEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(GEPI->getOperand(1)); 6796 // Check that GEPI is a cheap one. 6797 if (TTI->getIntImmCost(GEPIIdx->getValue(), GEPIIdx->getType()) 6798 > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic) 6799 return false; 6800 Value *GEPIOp = GEPI->getOperand(0); 6801 // Check that GEPIOp is an instruction that's also defined in SrcBlock. 6802 if (!isa<Instruction>(GEPIOp)) 6803 return false; 6804 auto *GEPIOpI = cast<Instruction>(GEPIOp); 6805 if (GEPIOpI->getParent() != SrcBlock) 6806 return false; 6807 // Check that GEP is used outside the block, meaning it's alive on the 6808 // IndirectBr edge(s). 6809 if (find_if(GEPI->users(), [&](User *Usr) { 6810 if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Usr)) { 6811 if (I->getParent() != SrcBlock) { 6812 return true; 6813 } 6814 } 6815 return false; 6816 }) == GEPI->users().end()) 6817 return false; 6818 // The second elements of the GEP chains to be unmerged. 6819 std::vector<GetElementPtrInst *> UGEPIs; 6820 // Check each user of GEPIOp to check if unmerging would make GEPIOp not alive 6821 // on IndirectBr edges. 6822 for (User *Usr : GEPIOp->users()) { 6823 if (Usr == GEPI) continue; 6824 // Check if Usr is an Instruction. If not, give up. 6825 if (!isa<Instruction>(Usr)) 6826 return false; 6827 auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(Usr); 6828 // Check if Usr in the same block as GEPIOp, which is fine, skip. 6829 if (UI->getParent() == SrcBlock) 6830 continue; 6831 // Check if Usr is a GEP. If not, give up. 6832 if (!isa<GetElementPtrInst>(Usr)) 6833 return false; 6834 auto *UGEPI = cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Usr); 6835 // Check if UGEPI is a simple gep with a single constant index and GEPIOp is 6836 // the pointer operand to it. If so, record it in the vector. If not, give 6837 // up. 6838 if (!GEPSequentialConstIndexed(UGEPI)) 6839 return false; 6840 if (UGEPI->getOperand(0) != GEPIOp) 6841 return false; 6842 if (GEPIIdx->getType() != 6843 cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1))->getType()) 6844 return false; 6845 ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1)); 6846 if (TTI->getIntImmCost(UGEPIIdx->getValue(), UGEPIIdx->getType()) 6847 > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic) 6848 return false; 6849 UGEPIs.push_back(UGEPI); 6850 } 6851 if (UGEPIs.size() == 0) 6852 return false; 6853 // Check the materializing cost of (Uidx-Idx). 6854 for (GetElementPtrInst *UGEPI : UGEPIs) { 6855 ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1)); 6856 APInt NewIdx = UGEPIIdx->getValue() - GEPIIdx->getValue(); 6857 unsigned ImmCost = TTI->getIntImmCost(NewIdx, GEPIIdx->getType()); 6858 if (ImmCost > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic) 6859 return false; 6860 } 6861 // Now unmerge between GEPI and UGEPIs. 6862 for (GetElementPtrInst *UGEPI : UGEPIs) { 6863 UGEPI->setOperand(0, GEPI); 6864 ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1)); 6865 Constant *NewUGEPIIdx = 6866 ConstantInt::get(GEPIIdx->getType(), 6867 UGEPIIdx->getValue() - GEPIIdx->getValue()); 6868 UGEPI->setOperand(1, NewUGEPIIdx); 6869 // If GEPI is not inbounds but UGEPI is inbounds, change UGEPI to not 6870 // inbounds to avoid UB. 6871 if (!GEPI->isInBounds()) { 6872 UGEPI->setIsInBounds(false); 6873 } 6874 } 6875 // After unmerging, verify that GEPIOp is actually only used in SrcBlock (not 6876 // alive on IndirectBr edges). 6877 assert(find_if(GEPIOp->users(), [&](User *Usr) { 6878 return cast<Instruction>(Usr)->getParent() != SrcBlock; 6879 }) == GEPIOp->users().end() && "GEPIOp is used outside SrcBlock"); 6880 return true; 6881 } 6882 6883 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInst(Instruction *I, DominatorTree &DT, 6884 bool &ModifiedDT) { 6885 // Bail out if we inserted the instruction to prevent optimizations from 6886 // stepping on each other's toes. 6887 if (InsertedInsts.count(I)) 6888 return false; 6889 6890 // TODO: Move into the switch on opcode below here. 6891 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) { 6892 // It is possible for very late stage optimizations (such as SimplifyCFG) 6893 // to introduce PHI nodes too late to be cleaned up. If we detect such a 6894 // trivial PHI, go ahead and zap it here. 6895 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(P, {*DL, TLInfo})) { 6896 LargeOffsetGEPMap.erase(P); 6897 P->replaceAllUsesWith(V); 6898 P->eraseFromParent(); 6899 ++NumPHIsElim; 6900 return true; 6901 } 6902 return false; 6903 } 6904 6905 if (CastInst *CI = dyn_cast<CastInst>(I)) { 6906 // If the source of the cast is a constant, then this should have 6907 // already been constant folded. The only reason NOT to constant fold 6908 // it is if something (e.g. LSR) was careful to place the constant 6909 // evaluation in a block other than then one that uses it (e.g. to hoist 6910 // the address of globals out of a loop). If this is the case, we don't 6911 // want to forward-subst the cast. 6912 if (isa<Constant>(CI->getOperand(0))) 6913 return false; 6914 6915 if (TLI && OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CI, *TLI, *DL)) 6916 return true; 6917 6918 if (isa<ZExtInst>(I) || isa<SExtInst>(I)) { 6919 /// Sink a zext or sext into its user blocks if the target type doesn't 6920 /// fit in one register 6921 if (TLI && 6922 TLI->getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), 6923 TLI->getValueType(*DL, CI->getType())) == 6924 TargetLowering::TypeExpandInteger) { 6925 return SinkCast(CI); 6926 } else { 6927 bool MadeChange = optimizeExt(I); 6928 return MadeChange | optimizeExtUses(I); 6929 } 6930 } 6931 return false; 6932 } 6933 6934 if (auto *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) 6935 if (TLI && optimizeCmp(Cmp, DT, ModifiedDT)) 6936 return true; 6937 6938 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) { 6939 LI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr); 6940 if (TLI) { 6941 bool Modified = optimizeLoadExt(LI); 6942 unsigned AS = LI->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6943 Modified |= optimizeMemoryInst(I, I->getOperand(0), LI->getType(), AS); 6944 return Modified; 6945 } 6946 return false; 6947 } 6948 6949 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I)) { 6950 if (TLI && splitMergedValStore(*SI, *DL, *TLI)) 6951 return true; 6952 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr); 6953 if (TLI) { 6954 unsigned AS = SI->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6955 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, SI->getOperand(1), 6956 SI->getOperand(0)->getType(), AS); 6957 } 6958 return false; 6959 } 6960 6961 if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(I)) { 6962 unsigned AS = RMW->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6963 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, RMW->getPointerOperand(), 6964 RMW->getType(), AS); 6965 } 6966 6967 if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(I)) { 6968 unsigned AS = CmpX->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6969 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, CmpX->getPointerOperand(), 6970 CmpX->getCompareOperand()->getType(), AS); 6971 } 6972 6973 BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(I); 6974 6975 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) && 6976 EnableAndCmpSinking && TLI) 6977 return sinkAndCmp0Expression(BinOp, *TLI, InsertedInsts); 6978 6979 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr || 6980 BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr)) { 6981 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(BinOp->getOperand(1)); 6982 if (TLI && CI && TLI->hasExtractBitsInsn()) 6983 return OptimizeExtractBits(BinOp, CI, *TLI, *DL); 6984 6985 return false; 6986 } 6987 6988 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEPI = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(I)) { 6989 if (GEPI->hasAllZeroIndices()) { 6990 /// The GEP operand must be a pointer, so must its result -> BitCast 6991 Instruction *NC = new BitCastInst(GEPI->getOperand(0), GEPI->getType(), 6992 GEPI->getName(), GEPI); 6993 NC->setDebugLoc(GEPI->getDebugLoc()); 6994 GEPI->replaceAllUsesWith(NC); 6995 GEPI->eraseFromParent(); 6996 ++NumGEPsElim; 6997 optimizeInst(NC, DT, ModifiedDT); 6998 return true; 6999 } 7000 if (tryUnmergingGEPsAcrossIndirectBr(GEPI, TTI)) { 7001 return true; 7002 } 7003 return false; 7004 } 7005 7006 if (tryToSinkFreeOperands(I)) 7007 return true; 7008 7009 switch (I->getOpcode()) { 7010 case Instruction::Call: 7011 return optimizeCallInst(cast<CallInst>(I), ModifiedDT); 7012 case Instruction::Select: 7013 return optimizeSelectInst(cast<SelectInst>(I), ModifiedDT); 7014 case Instruction::ShuffleVector: 7015 return optimizeShuffleVectorInst(cast<ShuffleVectorInst>(I)); 7016 case Instruction::Switch: 7017 return optimizeSwitchInst(cast<SwitchInst>(I)); 7018 case Instruction::ExtractElement: 7019 return optimizeExtractElementInst(cast<ExtractElementInst>(I)); 7020 } 7021 7022 return false; 7023 } 7024 7025 /// Given an OR instruction, check to see if this is a bitreverse 7026 /// idiom. If so, insert the new intrinsic and return true. 7027 static bool makeBitReverse(Instruction &I, const DataLayout &DL, 7028 const TargetLowering &TLI) { 7029 if (!I.getType()->isIntegerTy() || 7030 !TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(ISD::BITREVERSE, 7031 TLI.getValueType(DL, I.getType(), true))) 7032 return false; 7033 7034 SmallVector<Instruction*, 4> Insts; 7035 if (!recognizeBSwapOrBitReverseIdiom(&I, false, true, Insts)) 7036 return false; 7037 Instruction *LastInst = Insts.back(); 7038 I.replaceAllUsesWith(LastInst); 7039 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(&I); 7040 return true; 7041 } 7042 7043 // In this pass we look for GEP and cast instructions that are used 7044 // across basic blocks and rewrite them to improve basic-block-at-a-time 7045 // selection. 7046 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, DominatorTree &DT, 7047 bool &ModifiedDT) { 7048 SunkAddrs.clear(); 7049 bool MadeChange = false; 7050 7051 CurInstIterator = BB.begin(); 7052 while (CurInstIterator != BB.end()) { 7053 MadeChange |= optimizeInst(&*CurInstIterator++, DT, ModifiedDT); 7054 if (ModifiedDT) 7055 return true; 7056 } 7057 7058 bool MadeBitReverse = true; 7059 while (TLI && MadeBitReverse) { 7060 MadeBitReverse = false; 7061 for (auto &I : reverse(BB)) { 7062 if (makeBitReverse(I, *DL, *TLI)) { 7063 MadeBitReverse = MadeChange = true; 7064 ModifiedDT = true; 7065 break; 7066 } 7067 } 7068 } 7069 MadeChange |= dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(&BB, ModifiedDT); 7070 7071 return MadeChange; 7072 } 7073 7074 // llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able 7075 // handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not 7076 // find a node corresponding to the value. 7077 bool CodeGenPrepare::placeDbgValues(Function &F) { 7078 bool MadeChange = false; 7079 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) { 7080 Instruction *PrevNonDbgInst = nullptr; 7081 for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB.begin(), BE = BB.end(); BI != BE;) { 7082 Instruction *Insn = &*BI++; 7083 DbgValueInst *DVI = dyn_cast<DbgValueInst>(Insn); 7084 // Leave dbg.values that refer to an alloca alone. These 7085 // intrinsics describe the address of a variable (= the alloca) 7086 // being taken. They should not be moved next to the alloca 7087 // (and to the beginning of the scope), but rather stay close to 7088 // where said address is used. 7089 if (!DVI || (DVI->getValue() && isa<AllocaInst>(DVI->getValue()))) { 7090 PrevNonDbgInst = Insn; 7091 continue; 7092 } 7093 7094 Instruction *VI = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(DVI->getValue()); 7095 if (VI && VI != PrevNonDbgInst && !VI->isTerminator()) { 7096 // If VI is a phi in a block with an EHPad terminator, we can't insert 7097 // after it. 7098 if (isa<PHINode>(VI) && VI->getParent()->getTerminator()->isEHPad()) 7099 continue; 7100 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Moving Debug Value before :\n" 7101 << *DVI << ' ' << *VI); 7102 DVI->removeFromParent(); 7103 if (isa<PHINode>(VI)) 7104 DVI->insertBefore(&*VI->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt()); 7105 else 7106 DVI->insertAfter(VI); 7107 MadeChange = true; 7108 ++NumDbgValueMoved; 7109 } 7110 } 7111 } 7112 return MadeChange; 7113 } 7114 7115 /// Scale down both weights to fit into uint32_t. 7116 static void scaleWeights(uint64_t &NewTrue, uint64_t &NewFalse) { 7117 uint64_t NewMax = (NewTrue > NewFalse) ? NewTrue : NewFalse; 7118 uint32_t Scale = (NewMax / std::numeric_limits<uint32_t>::max()) + 1; 7119 NewTrue = NewTrue / Scale; 7120 NewFalse = NewFalse / Scale; 7121 } 7122 7123 /// Some targets prefer to split a conditional branch like: 7124 /// \code 7125 /// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0 7126 /// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0 7127 /// %or.cond = or i1 %0, %1 7128 /// br i1 %or.cond, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB 7129 /// \endcode 7130 /// into multiple branch instructions like: 7131 /// \code 7132 /// bb1: 7133 /// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0 7134 /// br i1 %0, label %TrueBB, label %bb2 7135 /// bb2: 7136 /// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0 7137 /// br i1 %1, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB 7138 /// \endcode 7139 /// This usually allows instruction selection to do even further optimizations 7140 /// and combine the compare with the branch instruction. Currently this is 7141 /// applied for targets which have "cheap" jump instructions. 7142 /// 7143 /// FIXME: Remove the (equivalent?) implementation in SelectionDAG. 7144 /// 7145 bool CodeGenPrepare::splitBranchCondition(Function &F, bool &ModifiedDT) { 7146 if (!TM || !TM->Options.EnableFastISel || !TLI || TLI->isJumpExpensive()) 7147 return false; 7148 7149 bool MadeChange = false; 7150 for (auto &BB : F) { 7151 // Does this BB end with the following? 7152 // %cond1 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ... 7153 // %cond2 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ... 7154 // %cond.or = or|and i1 %cond1, cond2 7155 // br i1 %cond.or label %dest1, label %dest2" 7156 BinaryOperator *LogicOp; 7157 BasicBlock *TBB, *FBB; 7158 if (!match(BB.getTerminator(), m_Br(m_OneUse(m_BinOp(LogicOp)), TBB, FBB))) 7159 continue; 7160 7161 auto *Br1 = cast<BranchInst>(BB.getTerminator()); 7162 if (Br1->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable)) 7163 continue; 7164 7165 unsigned Opc; 7166 Value *Cond1, *Cond2; 7167 if (match(LogicOp, m_And(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)), 7168 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2))))) 7169 Opc = Instruction::And; 7170 else if (match(LogicOp, m_Or(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)), 7171 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2))))) 7172 Opc = Instruction::Or; 7173 else 7174 continue; 7175 7176 if (!match(Cond1, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) || 7177 !match(Cond2, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) ) 7178 continue; 7179 7180 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Before branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump()); 7181 7182 // Create a new BB. 7183 auto TmpBB = 7184 BasicBlock::Create(BB.getContext(), BB.getName() + ".cond.split", 7185 BB.getParent(), BB.getNextNode()); 7186 7187 // Update original basic block by using the first condition directly by the 7188 // branch instruction and removing the no longer needed and/or instruction. 7189 Br1->setCondition(Cond1); 7190 LogicOp->eraseFromParent(); 7191 7192 // Depending on the condition we have to either replace the true or the 7193 // false successor of the original branch instruction. 7194 if (Opc == Instruction::And) 7195 Br1->setSuccessor(0, TmpBB); 7196 else 7197 Br1->setSuccessor(1, TmpBB); 7198 7199 // Fill in the new basic block. 7200 auto *Br2 = IRBuilder<>(TmpBB).CreateCondBr(Cond2, TBB, FBB); 7201 if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Cond2)) { 7202 I->removeFromParent(); 7203 I->insertBefore(Br2); 7204 } 7205 7206 // Update PHI nodes in both successors. The original BB needs to be 7207 // replaced in one successor's PHI nodes, because the branch comes now from 7208 // the newly generated BB (NewBB). In the other successor we need to add one 7209 // incoming edge to the PHI nodes, because both branch instructions target 7210 // now the same successor. Depending on the original branch condition 7211 // (and/or) we have to swap the successors (TrueDest, FalseDest), so that 7212 // we perform the correct update for the PHI nodes. 7213 // This doesn't change the successor order of the just created branch 7214 // instruction (or any other instruction). 7215 if (Opc == Instruction::Or) 7216 std::swap(TBB, FBB); 7217 7218 // Replace the old BB with the new BB. 7219 for (PHINode &PN : TBB->phis()) { 7220 int i; 7221 while ((i = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(&BB)) >= 0) 7222 PN.setIncomingBlock(i, TmpBB); 7223 } 7224 7225 // Add another incoming edge form the new BB. 7226 for (PHINode &PN : FBB->phis()) { 7227 auto *Val = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(&BB); 7228 PN.addIncoming(Val, TmpBB); 7229 } 7230 7231 // Update the branch weights (from SelectionDAGBuilder:: 7232 // FindMergedConditions). 7233 if (Opc == Instruction::Or) { 7234 // Codegen X | Y as: 7235 // BB1: 7236 // jmp_if_X TBB 7237 // jmp TmpBB 7238 // TmpBB: 7239 // jmp_if_Y TBB 7240 // jmp FBB 7241 // 7242 7243 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for NewBB. 7244 // The requirement is that 7245 // TrueProb for BB1 + (FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB) 7246 // = TrueProb for original BB. 7247 // Assuming the original weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's 7248 // weights to A and A+2B, and set TmpBB's weights to A and 2B. This choice 7249 // assumes that 7250 // TrueProb for BB1 == FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB. 7251 // Another choice is to assume TrueProb for BB1 equals to TrueProb for 7252 // TmpBB, but the math is more complicated. 7253 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight; 7254 if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) { 7255 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight; 7256 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = TrueWeight + 2 * FalseWeight; 7257 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 7258 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext()) 7259 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 7260 7261 NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight; 7262 NewFalseWeight = 2 * FalseWeight; 7263 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 7264 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext()) 7265 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 7266 } 7267 } else { 7268 // Codegen X & Y as: 7269 // BB1: 7270 // jmp_if_X TmpBB 7271 // jmp FBB 7272 // TmpBB: 7273 // jmp_if_Y TBB 7274 // jmp FBB 7275 // 7276 // This requires creation of TmpBB after CurBB. 7277 7278 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for TmpBB. 7279 // The requirement is that 7280 // FalseProb for BB1 + (TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB) 7281 // = FalseProb for original BB. 7282 // Assuming the original weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's 7283 // weights to 2A+B and B, and set TmpBB's weights to 2A and B. This choice 7284 // assumes that 7285 // FalseProb for BB1 == TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB. 7286 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight; 7287 if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) { 7288 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight + FalseWeight; 7289 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight; 7290 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 7291 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext()) 7292 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 7293 7294 NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight; 7295 NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight; 7296 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 7297 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext()) 7298 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 7299 } 7300 } 7301 7302 ModifiedDT = true; 7303 MadeChange = true; 7304 7305 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "After branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump(); 7306 TmpBB->dump()); 7307 } 7308 return MadeChange; 7309 } 7310